1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
991
992
993
994
995
996
997
998
999
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
1091
1092
1093
1094
1095
1096
1097
1098
1099
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1118
1119
1120
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
1239
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244
1245
1246
1247
1248
1249
1250
1251
1252
1253
1254
1255
1256
1257
1258
1259
1260
1261
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1363
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
1382
1383
1384
1385
1386
1387
1388
1389
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434
1435
1436
1437
1438
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456
1457
1458
1459
1460
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465
1466
1467
1468
1469
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1476
1477
1478
1479
1480
1481
1482
1483
1484
1485
1486
1487
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
1920
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
2038
2039
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060
2061
2062
2063
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
2117
2118
2119
2120
2121
2122
2123
2124
2125
2126
2127
2128
2129
2130
2131
2132
2133
2134
2135
2136
2137
2138
2139
2140
2141
2142
2143
2144
2145
2146
2147
2148
2149
2150
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
2172
2173
2174
2175
2176
2177
2178
2179
2180
2181
2182
2183
2184
2185
2186
2187
2188
2189
2190
2191
2192
2193
2194
2195
2196
2197
2198
2199
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
2250
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263
2264
2265
2266
2267
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
2282
2283
2284
2285
2286
2287
2288
2289
2290
2291
2292
2293
2294
2295
2296
2297
2298
2299
2300
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2315
2316
2317
2318
2319
2320
2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2334
2335
2336
2337
2338
2339
2340
2341
2342
2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
2350
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
2357
2358
2359
2360
2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
2373
2374
2375
2376
2377
2378
2379
2380
2381
2382
2383
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
2390
2391
2392
2393
2394
2395
2396
2397
2398
2399
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2415
2416
2417
2418
2419
2420
2421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
2430
2431
2432
2433
2434
2435
2436
2437
2438
2439
2440
2441
2442
2443
2444
2445
2446
2447
2448
2449
2450
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
2457
2458
2459
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2469
2470
2471
2472
2473
2474
2475
2476
2477
2478
2479
2480
2481
2482
2483
2484
2485
2486
2487
2488
2489
2490
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
2496
2497
2498
2499
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510
2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
2518
2519
2520
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560
2561
2562
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2627
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632
2633
2634
2635
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640
2641
2642
2643
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2658
2659
2660
2661
2662
2663
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686
2687
2688
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
2820
2821
2822
2823
2824
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
2830
2831
2832
2833
2834
2835
2836
2837
2838
2839
2840
2841
2842
2843
2844
2845
2846
2847
2848
2849
2850
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
2870
2871
2872
2873
2874
2875
2876
2877
2878
2879
2880
2881
2882
2883
2884
2885
2886
2887
2888
2889
2890
2891
2892
2893
2894
2895
2896
2897
2898
2899
2900
2901
2902
2903
2904
2905
2906
2907
2908
2909
2910
2911
2912
2913
2914
2915
2916
2917
2918
2919
2920
2921
2922
2923
2924
2925
2926
2927
2928
2929
2930
2931
2932
2933
2934
2935
2936
2937
2938
2939
2940
2941
2942
2943
2944
2945
2946
2947
2948
2949
2950
2951
2952
2953
2954
2955
2956
2957
2958
2959
2960
2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
2966
2967
2968
2969
2970
2971
2972
2973
2974
2975
2976
2977
2978
2979
2980
2981
2982
2983
2984
2985
2986
2987
2988
2989
2990
2991
2992
2993
2994
2995
2996
2997
2998
2999
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3008
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
3024
3025
3026
3027
3028
3029
3030
3031
3032
3033
3034
3035
3036
3037
3038
3039
3040
3041
3042
3043
3044
3045
3046
3047
3048
3049
3050
3051
3052
3053
3054
3055
3056
3057
3058
3059
3060
3061
3062
3063
3064
3065
3066
3067
3068
3069
3070
3071
3072
3073
3074
3075
3076
3077
3078
3079
3080
3081
3082
3083
3084
3085
3086
3087
3088
3089
3090
3091
3092
3093
3094
3095
3096
3097
3098
3099
3100
3101
3102
3103
3104
3105
3106
3107
3108
3109
3110
3111
3112
3113
3114
3115
3116
3117
3118
3119
3120
3121
3122
3123
3124
3125
3126
3127
3128
3129
3130
3131
3132
3133
3134
3135
3136
3137
3138
3139
3140
3141
3142
3143
3144
3145
3146
3147
3148
3149
3150
3151
3152
3153
3154
3155
3156
3157
3158
3159
3160
3161
3162
3163
3164
3165
3166
3167
3168
3169
3170
3171
3172
3173
3174
3175
3176
3177
3178
3179
3180
3181
3182
3183
3184
3185
3186
3187
3188
3189
3190
3191
3192
3193
3194
3195
3196
3197
3198
3199
3200
3201
3202
3203
3204
3205
3206
3207
3208
3209
3210
3211
3212
3213
3214
3215
3216
3217
3218
3219
3220
3221
3222
3223
3224
3225
3226
3227
3228
3229
3230
3231
3232
3233
3234
3235
3236
3237
3238
3239
3240
3241
3242
3243
3244
3245
3246
3247
3248
3249
3250
3251
3252
3253
3254
3255
3256
3257
3258
3259
3260
3261
3262
3263
3264
3265
3266
3267
3268
3269
3270
3271
3272
3273
3274
3275
3276
3277
3278
3279
3280
3281
3282
3283
3284
3285
3286
3287
3288
3289
3290
3291
3292
3293
3294
3295
3296
3297
3298
3299
3300
3301
3302
3303
3304
3305
3306
3307
3308
3309
3310
3311
3312
3313
3314
3315
3316
3317
3318
3319
3320
3321
3322
3323
3324
3325
3326
3327
3328
3329
3330
3331
3332
3333
3334
3335
3336
3337
3338
3339
3340
3341
3342
3343
3344
3345
3346
3347
3348
3349
3350
3351
3352
3353
3354
3355
3356
3357
3358
3359
3360
3361
3362
3363
3364
3365
3366
3367
3368
3369
3370
3371
3372
3373
3374
3375
3376
3377
3378
3379
3380
3381
3382
3383
3384
3385
3386
3387
3388
3389
3390
3391
3392
3393
3394
3395
3396
3397
3398
3399
3400
3401
3402
3403
3404
3405
3406
3407
3408
3409
3410
3411
3412
3413
3414
3415
3416
3417
3418
3419
3420
3421
3422
3423
3424
3425
3426
3427
3428
3429
3430
3431
3432
3433
3434
3435
3436
3437
3438
3439
3440
3441
3442
3443
3444
3445
3446
3447
3448
3449
3450
3451
3452
3453
3454
3455
3456
3457
3458
3459
3460
3461
3462
3463
3464
3465
3466
3467
3468
3469
3470
3471
3472
3473
3474
3475
3476
3477
3478
3479
3480
3481
3482
3483
3484
3485
3486
3487
3488
3489
3490
3491
3492
3493
3494
3495
3496
3497
3498
3499
3500
3501
3502
3503
3504
3505
3506
3507
3508
3509
3510
3511
3512
3513
3514
3515
3516
3517
3518
3519
3520
3521
3522
3523
3524
3525
3526
3527
3528
3529
3530
3531
3532
3533
3534
3535
3536
3537
3538
3539
3540
3541
3542
3543
3544
3545
3546
3547
3548
3549
3550
3551
3552
3553
3554
3555
3556
3557
3558
3559
3560
3561
3562
3563
3564
3565
3566
3567
3568
3569
3570
3571
3572
3573
3574
3575
3576
3577
3578
3579
3580
3581
3582
3583
3584
3585
3586
3587
3588
3589
3590
3591
3592
3593
3594
3595
3596
3597
3598
3599
3600
3601
3602
3603
3604
3605
3606
3607
3608
3609
3610
3611
3612
3613
3614
3615
3616
3617
3618
3619
3620
3621
3622
3623
3624
3625
3626
3627
3628
3629
3630
3631
3632
3633
3634
3635
3636
3637
3638
3639
3640
3641
3642
3643
3644
3645
3646
3647
3648
3649
3650
3651
3652
3653
3654
3655
3656
3657
3658
3659
3660
3661
3662
3663
3664
3665
3666
3667
3668
3669
3670
3671
3672
3673
3674
3675
3676
3677
3678
3679
3680
3681
3682
3683
3684
3685
3686
3687
3688
3689
3690
3691
3692
3693
3694
3695
3696
3697
3698
3699
3700
3701
3702
3703
3704
3705
3706
3707
3708
3709
3710
3711
3712
3713
3714
3715
3716
3717
3718
3719
3720
3721
3722
3723
3724
3725
3726
3727
3728
3729
3730
3731
3732
3733
3734
3735
3736
3737
3738
3739
3740
3741
3742
3743
3744
3745
3746
3747
3748
3749
3750
3751
3752
3753
3754
3755
3756
3757
3758
3759
3760
3761
3762
3763
3764
3765
3766
3767
3768
3769
3770
3771
3772
3773
3774
3775
3776
3777
3778
3779
3780
3781
3782
3783
3784
3785
3786
3787
3788
3789
3790
3791
3792
3793
3794
3795
3796
3797
3798
3799
3800
3801
3802
3803
3804
3805
3806
3807
3808
3809
3810
3811
3812
3813
3814
3815
3816
3817
3818
3819
3820
3821
3822
3823
3824
3825
3826
3827
3828
3829
3830
3831
3832
3833
3834
3835
3836
3837
3838
3839
3840
3841
3842
3843
3844
3845
3846
3847
3848
3849
3850
3851
3852
3853
3854
3855
3856
3857
3858
3859
3860
3861
3862
3863
3864
3865
3866
3867
3868
3869
3870
3871
3872
3873
3874
3875
3876
3877
3878
3879
3880
3881
3882
3883
3884
3885
3886
3887
3888
3889
3890
3891
3892
3893
3894
3895
3896
3897
3898
3899
3900
3901
3902
3903
3904
3905
3906
3907
3908
3909
3910
3911
3912
3913
3914
3915
3916
3917
3918
3919
3920
3921
3922
3923
3924
3925
3926
3927
3928
3929
3930
3931
3932
3933
3934
3935
3936
3937
3938
3939
3940
3941
3942
3943
3944
3945
3946
3947
3948
3949
3950
3951
3952
3953
3954
3955
3956
3957
3958
3959
3960
3961
3962
3963
3964
3965
3966
3967
3968
3969
3970
3971
3972
3973
3974
3975
3976
3977
3978
3979
3980
3981
3982
3983
3984
3985
3986
3987
3988
3989
3990
3991
3992
3993
3994
3995
3996
3997
3998
3999
4000
4001
4002
4003
4004
4005
4006
4007
4008
4009
4010
4011
4012
4013
4014
4015
4016
4017
4018
4019
4020
4021
4022
4023
4024
4025
4026
4027
4028
4029
4030
4031
4032
4033
4034
4035
4036
4037
4038
4039
4040
4041
4042
4043
4044
4045
4046
4047
4048
4049
4050
4051
4052
4053
4054
4055
4056
4057
4058
4059
4060
4061
4062
4063
4064
4065
4066
4067
4068
4069
4070
4071
4072
4073
4074
4075
4076
4077
4078
4079
4080
4081
4082
4083
4084
4085
4086
4087
4088
4089
4090
4091
4092
4093
4094
4095
4096
4097
4098
4099
4100
4101
4102
4103
4104
4105
4106
4107
4108
4109
4110
4111
4112
4113
4114
4115
4116
4117
4118
4119
4120
4121
4122
4123
4124
4125
4126
4127
4128
4129
4130
4131
4132
4133
4134
4135
4136
4137
4138
4139
4140
4141
4142
4143
4144
4145
4146
4147
4148
4149
4150
4151
4152
4153
4154
4155
4156
4157
4158
4159
4160
4161
4162
4163
4164
4165
4166
4167
4168
4169
4170
4171
4172
4173
4174
4175
4176
4177
4178
4179
4180
4181
4182
4183
4184
4185
4186
4187
4188
4189
4190
4191
4192
4193
4194
4195
4196
4197
4198
4199
4200
4201
4202
4203
4204
4205
4206
4207
4208
4209
4210
4211
4212
4213
4214
4215
4216
4217
4218
4219
4220
4221
4222
4223
4224
4225
4226
4227
4228
4229
4230
4231
4232
4233
4234
4235
4236
4237
4238
4239
4240
4241
4242
4243
4244
4245
4246
4247
4248
4249
4250
4251
4252
4253
4254
4255
4256
4257
4258
4259
4260
4261
4262
4263
4264
4265
4266
4267
4268
4269
4270
4271
4272
4273
4274
4275
4276
4277
4278
4279
4280
4281
4282
4283
4284
4285
4286
4287
4288
4289
4290
4291
4292
4293
4294
4295
4296
4297
4298
4299
4300
4301
4302
4303
4304
4305
4306
4307
4308
4309
4310
4311
4312
4313
4314
4315
4316
4317
4318
4319
4320
4321
4322
4323
4324
4325
4326
4327
4328
4329
4330
4331
4332
4333
4334
4335
4336
4337
4338
4339
4340
4341
4342
4343
4344
4345
4346
4347
4348
4349
4350
4351
4352
4353
4354
4355
4356
4357
4358
4359
4360
4361
4362
4363
4364
4365
4366
4367
4368
4369
4370
4371
4372
4373
4374
4375
4376
4377
4378
4379
4380
4381
4382
4383
4384
4385
4386
4387
4388
4389
4390
4391
4392
4393
4394
4395
4396
4397
4398
4399
4400
4401
4402
4403
4404
4405
4406
4407
4408
4409
4410
4411
4412
4413
4414
4415
4416
4417
4418
4419
4420
4421
4422
4423
4424
4425
4426
4427
4428
4429
4430
4431
4432
4433
4434
4435
4436
4437
4438
4439
4440
4441
4442
4443
4444
4445
4446
4447
4448
4449
4450
4451
4452
4453
4454
4455
4456
4457
4458
4459
4460
4461
4462
4463
4464
4465
4466
4467
4468
4469
4470
4471
4472
4473
4474
4475
4476
4477
4478
4479
4480
4481
4482
4483
4484
4485
4486
4487
4488
4489
4490
4491
4492
4493
4494
4495
4496
4497
4498
4499
4500
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
4506
4507
4508
4509
4510
4511
4512
4513
4514
4515
4516
4517
4518
4519
4520
4521
4522
4523
4524
4525
4526
4527
4528
4529
4530
4531
4532
4533
4534
4535
4536
4537
4538
4539
4540
4541
4542
4543
4544
4545
4546
4547
4548
4549
4550
4551
4552
4553
4554
4555
4556
4557
4558
4559
4560
4561
4562
4563
4564
4565
4566
4567
4568
4569
4570
4571
4572
4573
4574
4575
4576
4577
4578
4579
4580
4581
4582
4583
4584
4585
4586
4587
4588
4589
4590
4591
4592
4593
4594
4595
4596
4597
4598
4599
4600
4601
4602
4603
4604
4605
4606
4607
4608
4609
4610
4611
4612
4613
4614
4615
4616
4617
4618
4619
4620
4621
4622
4623
4624
4625
4626
4627
4628
4629
4630
4631
4632
4633
4634
4635
4636
4637
4638
4639
4640
4641
4642
4643
4644
4645
4646
4647
4648
4649
4650
4651
4652
4653
4654
4655
4656
4657
4658
4659
4660
4661
4662
4663
4664
4665
4666
4667
4668
4669
4670
4671
4672
4673
4674
4675
4676
4677
4678
4679
4680
4681
4682
4683
4684
4685
4686
4687
4688
4689
4690
4691
4692
4693
4694
4695
4696
4697
4698
4699
4700
4701
4702
4703
4704
4705
4706
4707
4708
4709
4710
4711
4712
4713
4714
4715
4716
4717
4718
4719
4720
4721
4722
4723
4724
4725
4726
4727
4728
4729
4730
4731
4732
4733
4734
4735
4736
4737
4738
4739
4740
4741
4742
4743
4744
4745
4746
4747
4748
4749
4750
4751
4752
4753
4754
4755
4756
4757
4758
4759
4760
4761
4762
4763
4764
4765
4766
4767
4768
4769
4770
4771
4772
4773
4774
4775
4776
4777
4778
4779
4780
4781
4782
4783
4784
4785
4786
4787
4788
4789
4790
4791
4792
4793
4794
4795
4796
4797
4798
4799
4800
4801
4802
4803
4804
4805
4806
4807
4808
4809
4810
4811
4812
4813
4814
4815
4816
4817
4818
4819
4820
4821
4822
4823
4824
4825
4826
4827
4828
4829
4830
4831
4832
4833
4834
4835
4836
4837
4838
4839
4840
4841
4842
4843
4844
4845
4846
4847
4848
4849
4850
4851
4852
4853
4854
4855
4856
4857
4858
4859
4860
4861
4862
4863
4864
4865
4866
4867
4868
4869
4870
4871
4872
4873
4874
4875
4876
4877
4878
4879
4880
4881
4882
4883
4884
4885
4886
4887
4888
4889
4890
4891
4892
4893
4894
4895
4896
4897
4898
4899
4900
4901
4902
4903
4904
4905
4906
4907
4908
4909
4910
4911
4912
4913
4914
4915
4916
4917
4918
4919
4920
4921
4922
4923
4924
4925
4926
4927
4928
4929
4930
4931
4932
4933
4934
4935
4936
4937
4938
4939
4940
4941
4942
4943
4944
4945
4946
4947
4948
4949
4950
4951
4952
4953
4954
4955
4956
4957
4958
4959
4960
4961
4962
4963
4964
4965
4966
4967
4968
4969
4970
4971
4972
4973
4974
4975
4976
4977
4978
4979
4980
4981
4982
4983
4984
4985
4986
4987
4988
4989
4990
4991
4992
4993
4994
4995
4996
4997
4998
4999
5000
5001
5002
5003
5004
5005
5006
5007
5008
5009
5010
5011
5012
5013
5014
5015
5016
5017
5018
5019
5020
5021
5022
5023
5024
5025
5026
5027
5028
5029
5030
5031
5032
5033
5034
5035
5036
5037
5038
5039
5040
5041
5042
5043
5044
5045
5046
5047
5048
5049
5050
5051
5052
5053
5054
5055
5056
5057
5058
5059
5060
5061
5062
5063
5064
5065
5066
5067
5068
5069
5070
5071
5072
5073
5074
5075
5076
5077
5078
5079
5080
5081
5082
5083
5084
5085
5086
5087
5088
5089
5090
5091
5092
5093
5094
5095
5096
5097
5098
5099
5100
5101
5102
5103
5104
5105
5106
5107
5108
5109
5110
5111
5112
5113
5114
5115
5116
5117
5118
5119
5120
5121
5122
5123
5124
5125
5126
5127
5128
5129
5130
5131
5132
5133
5134
5135
5136
5137
5138
5139
5140
5141
5142
5143
5144
5145
5146
5147
5148
5149
5150
5151
5152
5153
5154
5155
5156
5157
5158
5159
5160
5161
5162
5163
5164
5165
5166
5167
5168
5169
5170
5171
5172
5173
5174
5175
5176
5177
5178
5179
5180
5181
5182
5183
5184
5185
5186
5187
5188
5189
5190
5191
5192
5193
5194
5195
5196
5197
5198
5199
5200
5201
5202
5203
5204
5205
5206
5207
5208
5209
5210
5211
5212
5213
5214
5215
5216
5217
5218
5219
5220
5221
5222
5223
5224
5225
5226
5227
5228
5229
5230
5231
5232
5233
5234
5235
5236
5237
5238
5239
5240
5241
5242
5243
5244
5245
5246
5247
5248
5249
5250
5251
5252
5253
5254
5255
5256
5257
5258
5259
5260
5261
5262
5263
5264
5265
5266
5267
5268
5269
5270
5271
5272
5273
5274
5275
5276
5277
5278
5279
5280
5281
5282
5283
5284
5285
5286
5287
5288
5289
5290
5291
5292
5293
5294
5295
5296
5297
5298
5299
5300
5301
5302
5303
5304
5305
5306
5307
5308
5309
5310
5311
5312
5313
5314
5315
5316
5317
5318
5319
5320
5321
5322
5323
5324
5325
5326
5327
5328
5329
5330
5331
5332
5333
5334
5335
5336
5337
5338
5339
5340
5341
5342
5343
5344
5345
5346
5347
5348
5349
5350
5351
5352
5353
5354
5355
5356
5357
5358
5359
5360
5361
5362
5363
5364
5365
5366
5367
5368
5369
5370
5371
5372
5373
5374
5375
5376
5377
5378
5379
5380
5381
5382
5383
5384
5385
5386
5387
5388
5389
5390
5391
5392
5393
5394
5395
5396
5397
5398
5399
5400
5401
5402
5403
5404
5405
5406
5407
5408
5409
5410
5411
5412
5413
5414
5415
5416
5417
5418
5419
5420
5421
5422
5423
5424
5425
5426
5427
5428
5429
5430
5431
5432
5433
5434
5435
5436
5437
5438
5439
5440
5441
5442
5443
5444
5445
5446
5447
5448
5449
5450
5451
5452
5453
5454
5455
5456
5457
5458
5459
5460
5461
5462
5463
5464
5465
5466
5467
5468
5469
5470
5471
5472
5473
5474
5475
5476
5477
5478
5479
5480
5481
5482
5483
5484
5485
5486
5487
5488
5489
5490
5491
5492
5493
5494
5495
5496
5497
5498
5499
5500
5501
5502
5503
5504
5505
5506
5507
5508
5509
5510
5511
5512
5513
5514
5515
5516
5517
5518
5519
5520
5521
5522
5523
5524
5525
5526
5527
5528
5529
5530
5531
5532
5533
5534
5535
5536
5537
5538
5539
5540
5541
5542
5543
5544
5545
5546
5547
5548
5549
5550
5551
5552
5553
5554
5555
5556
5557
5558
5559
5560
5561
5562
5563
5564
5565
5566
5567
5568
5569
5570
5571
5572
5573
5574
5575
5576
5577
5578
5579
5580
5581
5582
5583
5584
5585
5586
5587
5588
5589
5590
5591
5592
5593
5594
5595
5596
5597
5598
5599
5600
5601
5602
5603
5604
5605
5606
5607
5608
5609
5610
5611
5612
5613
5614
5615
5616
5617
5618
5619
5620
5621
5622
5623
5624
5625
5626
5627
5628
5629
5630
5631
5632
5633
5634
5635
5636
5637
5638
5639
5640
5641
5642
5643
5644
5645
5646
5647
5648
5649
5650
5651
5652
5653
5654
5655
5656
5657
5658
5659
5660
5661
5662
5663
5664
5665
5666
5667
5668
5669
5670
5671
5672
5673
5674
5675
5676
5677
5678
5679
5680
5681
5682
5683
5684
5685
5686
5687
5688
5689
5690
5691
5692
5693
5694
5695
5696
5697
5698
5699
5700
5701
5702
5703
5704
5705
5706
5707
5708
5709
5710
5711
5712
5713
5714
5715
5716
5717
5718
5719
5720
5721
5722
5723
5724
5725
5726
5727
5728
5729
5730
5731
5732
5733
5734
5735
5736
5737
5738
5739
5740
5741
5742
5743
5744
5745
5746
5747
5748
5749
5750
5751
5752
5753
5754
5755
5756
5757
5758
5759
5760
5761
5762
5763
5764
5765
5766
5767
5768
5769
5770
5771
5772
5773
5774
5775
5776
5777
5778
5779
5780
5781
5782
5783
5784
5785
5786
5787
5788
5789
5790
5791
5792
5793
5794
5795
5796
5797
5798
5799
5800
5801
5802
5803
5804
5805
5806
5807
5808
5809
5810
5811
5812
5813
5814
5815
5816
5817
5818
5819
5820
5821
5822
5823
5824
5825
5826
5827
5828
5829
5830
5831
5832
5833
5834
5835
5836
5837
5838
5839
5840
5841
5842
5843
5844
5845
5846
5847
5848
5849
5850
5851
5852
5853
5854
5855
5856
5857
5858
5859
5860
5861
5862
5863
5864
5865
5866
5867
5868
5869
5870
5871
5872
5873
5874
5875
5876
5877
5878
5879
5880
5881
5882
5883
5884
5885
5886
5887
5888
5889
5890
5891
5892
5893
5894
5895
5896
5897
5898
5899
5900
5901
5902
5903
5904
5905
5906
5907
5908
5909
5910
5911
5912
5913
5914
5915
5916
5917
5918
5919
5920
5921
5922
5923
5924
5925
5926
5927
5928
5929
5930
5931
5932
5933
5934
5935
5936
5937
5938
5939
5940
5941
5942
5943
5944
5945
5946
5947
5948
5949
5950
5951
5952
5953
5954
5955
5956
5957
5958
5959
5960
5961
5962
5963
5964
5965
5966
5967
5968
5969
5970
5971
5972
5973
5974
5975
5976
5977
5978
5979
5980
5981
5982
5983
5984
5985
5986
5987
5988
5989
5990
5991
5992
5993
5994
5995
5996
5997
5998
5999
6000
6001
6002
6003
6004
6005
6006
6007
6008
6009
6010
6011
6012
6013
6014
6015
6016
6017
6018
6019
6020
6021
6022
6023
6024
6025
6026
6027
6028
6029
6030
6031
6032
6033
6034
6035
6036
6037
6038
6039
6040
6041
6042
6043
6044
6045
6046
6047
6048
6049
6050
6051
6052
6053
6054
6055
6056
6057
6058
6059
6060
6061
6062
6063
6064
6065
6066
6067
6068
6069
6070
6071
6072
6073
6074
6075
6076
6077
6078
6079
6080
6081
6082
6083
6084
6085
6086
6087
6088
6089
6090
6091
6092
6093
6094
6095
6096
6097
6098
6099
6100
6101
6102
6103
6104
6105
6106
6107
6108
6109
6110
6111
6112
6113
6114
6115
6116
6117
6118
6119
6120
6121
6122
6123
6124
6125
6126
6127
6128
6129
6130
6131
6132
6133
6134
6135
6136
6137
6138
6139
6140
6141
6142
6143
6144
6145
6146
6147
6148
6149
6150
6151
6152
6153
6154
6155
6156
6157
6158
6159
6160
6161
6162
6163
6164
6165
6166
6167
6168
6169
6170
6171
6172
6173
6174
6175
6176
6177
6178
6179
6180
6181
6182
6183
6184
6185
6186
6187
6188
6189
6190
6191
6192
6193
6194
6195
6196
6197
6198
6199
6200
6201
6202
6203
6204
6205
6206
6207
6208
6209
6210
6211
6212
6213
6214
6215
6216
6217
6218
6219
6220
6221
6222
6223
6224
6225
6226
6227
6228
6229
6230
6231
6232
6233
6234
6235
6236
6237
6238
6239
6240
6241
6242
6243
6244
6245
6246
6247
6248
6249
6250
6251
6252
6253
6254
6255
6256
6257
6258
6259
6260
6261
6262
6263
6264
6265
6266
6267
6268
6269
6270
6271
6272
6273
6274
6275
6276
6277
6278
6279
6280
6281
6282
6283
6284
6285
6286
6287
6288
6289
6290
6291
6292
6293
6294
6295
6296
6297
6298
6299
6300
6301
6302
6303
6304
6305
6306
6307
6308
6309
6310
6311
6312
6313
6314
6315
6316
6317
6318
6319
6320
6321
6322
6323
6324
6325
6326
6327
6328
6329
6330
6331
6332
6333
6334
6335
6336
6337
6338
6339
6340
6341
6342
6343
6344
6345
6346
6347
6348
6349
6350
6351
6352
6353
6354
6355
6356
6357
6358
6359
6360
6361
6362
6363
6364
6365
6366
6367
6368
6369
6370
6371
6372
6373
6374
6375
6376
6377
6378
6379
6380
6381
6382
6383
6384
6385
6386
6387
6388
6389
6390
6391
6392
6393
6394
6395
6396
6397
6398
6399
6400
6401
6402
6403
6404
6405
6406
6407
6408
6409
6410
6411
6412
6413
6414
6415
6416
6417
6418
6419
6420
6421
6422
6423
6424
6425
6426
6427
6428
6429
6430
6431
6432
6433
6434
6435
6436
6437
6438
6439
6440
6441
6442
6443
6444
6445
6446
6447
6448
6449
6450
6451
6452
6453
6454
6455
6456
6457
6458
6459
6460
6461
6462
6463
6464
6465
6466
6467
6468
6469
6470
6471
6472
6473
6474
6475
6476
6477
6478
6479
6480
6481
6482
6483
6484
6485
6486
6487
6488
6489
6490
6491
6492
6493
6494
6495
6496
6497
6498
6499
6500
6501
6502
6503
6504
6505
6506
6507
6508
6509
6510
6511
6512
6513
6514
6515
6516
6517
6518
6519
6520
6521
6522
6523
6524
6525
6526
6527
6528
6529
6530
6531
6532
6533
6534
6535
6536
6537
6538
6539
6540
6541
6542
6543
6544
6545
6546
6547
6548
6549
6550
6551
6552
6553
6554
6555
6556
6557
6558
6559
6560
6561
6562
6563
6564
6565
6566
6567
6568
6569
6570
6571
6572
6573
6574
6575
6576
6577
6578
6579
6580
6581
6582
6583
6584
6585
6586
6587
6588
6589
6590
6591
6592
6593
6594
6595
6596
6597
6598
6599
6600
6601
6602
6603
6604
6605
6606
6607
6608
6609
6610
6611
6612
6613
6614
6615
6616
6617
6618
6619
6620
6621
6622
6623
6624
6625
6626
6627
6628
6629
6630
6631
6632
6633
6634
6635
6636
6637
6638
6639
6640
6641
6642
6643
6644
6645
6646
6647
6648
6649
6650
6651
6652
6653
6654
6655
6656
6657
6658
6659
6660
6661
6662
6663
6664
6665
6666
6667
6668
6669
6670
6671
6672
6673
6674
6675
6676
6677
6678
6679
6680
6681
6682
6683
6684
6685
6686
6687
6688
6689
6690
6691
6692
6693
6694
6695
6696
6697
6698
6699
6700
6701
6702
6703
6704
6705
6706
6707
6708
6709
6710
6711
6712
6713
6714
6715
6716
6717
6718
6719
6720
6721
6722
6723
6724
6725
6726
6727
6728
6729
6730
6731
6732
6733
6734
6735
6736
6737
6738
6739
6740
6741
6742
6743
6744
6745
6746
6747
6748
6749
6750
6751
6752
6753
6754
6755
6756
6757
6758
6759
6760
6761
6762
6763
6764
6765
6766
6767
6768
6769
6770
6771
6772
6773
6774
6775
6776
6777
6778
6779
6780
6781
6782
6783
6784
6785
6786
6787
6788
6789
6790
6791
6792
6793
6794
6795
6796
6797
6798
6799
6800
6801
6802
6803
6804
6805
6806
6807
6808
6809
6810
6811
6812
6813
6814
6815
6816
6817
6818
6819
6820
6821
6822
6823
6824
6825
6826
6827
6828
6829
6830
6831
6832
6833
6834
6835
6836
6837
6838
6839
6840
6841
6842
6843
6844
6845
6846
6847
6848
6849
6850
6851
6852
6853
6854
6855
6856
6857
6858
6859
6860
6861
6862
6863
6864
6865
6866
6867
6868
6869
6870
6871
6872
6873
6874
6875
6876
6877
6878
6879
6880
6881
6882
6883
6884
6885
6886
6887
6888
6889
6890
6891
6892
6893
6894
6895
6896
6897
6898
6899
6900
6901
6902
6903
6904
6905
6906
6907
6908
6909
6910
6911
6912
6913
6914
6915
6916
6917
6918
6919
6920
6921
6922
6923
6924
6925
6926
6927
6928
6929
6930
6931
6932
6933
6934
6935
6936
6937
6938
6939
6940
6941
6942
6943
6944
6945
6946
6947
6948
6949
6950
6951
6952
6953
6954
6955
6956
6957
6958
6959
6960
6961
6962
6963
6964
6965
6966
6967
6968
6969
6970
6971
6972
6973
6974
6975
6976
6977
6978
6979
6980
6981
6982
6983
6984
6985
6986
6987
6988
6989
6990
6991
6992
6993
6994
6995
6996
6997
6998
6999
7000
7001
7002
7003
7004
7005
7006
7007
7008
7009
7010
7011
7012
7013
7014
7015
7016
7017
7018
7019
7020
7021
7022
7023
7024
7025
7026
7027
7028
7029
7030
7031
7032
7033
7034
7035
7036
7037
7038
7039
7040
7041
7042
7043
7044
7045
7046
7047
7048
7049
7050
7051
7052
7053
7054
7055
7056
7057
7058
7059
7060
7061
7062
7063
7064
7065
7066
7067
7068
7069
7070
7071
7072
7073
7074
7075
7076
7077
7078
7079
7080
7081
7082
7083
7084
7085
7086
7087
7088
7089
7090
7091
7092
7093
7094
7095
7096
7097
7098
7099
7100
7101
7102
7103
7104
7105
7106
7107
7108
7109
7110
7111
7112
7113
7114
7115
7116
7117
7118
7119
7120
7121
7122
7123
7124
7125
7126
7127
7128
7129
7130
7131
7132
7133
7134
7135
7136
7137
7138
7139
7140
7141
7142
7143
7144
7145
7146
7147
7148
7149
7150
7151
7152
7153
7154
7155
7156
7157
7158
7159
7160
7161
7162
7163
7164
7165
7166
7167
7168
7169
7170
7171
7172
7173
7174
7175
7176
7177
7178
7179
7180
7181
7182
7183
7184
7185
7186
7187
7188
7189
7190
7191
7192
7193
7194
7195
7196
7197
7198
7199
7200
7201
7202
7203
7204
7205
7206
7207
7208
7209
7210
7211
7212
7213
7214
7215
7216
7217
7218
7219
7220
7221
7222
7223
7224
7225
7226
7227
7228
7229
7230
7231
7232
7233
7234
7235
7236
7237
7238
7239
7240
7241
7242
7243
7244
7245
7246
7247
7248
7249
7250
7251
7252
7253
7254
7255
7256
7257
7258
7259
7260
7261
7262
7263
7264
7265
7266
7267
7268
7269
7270
7271
7272
7273
7274
7275
7276
7277
7278
7279
7280
7281
7282
7283
7284
7285
7286
7287
7288
7289
7290
7291
7292
7293
7294
7295
7296
7297
7298
7299
7300
7301
7302
7303
7304
7305
7306
7307
7308
7309
7310
7311
7312
7313
7314
7315
7316
7317
7318
7319
7320
7321
7322
7323
7324
7325
7326
7327
7328
7329
7330
7331
7332
7333
7334
7335
7336
7337
7338
7339
7340
7341
7342
7343
7344
7345
7346
7347
7348
7349
7350
7351
7352
7353
7354
7355
7356
7357
7358
7359
7360
7361
7362
7363
7364
7365
7366
7367
7368
7369
7370
7371
7372
7373
7374
7375
7376
7377
7378
7379
7380
7381
7382
7383
7384
7385
7386
7387
7388
7389
7390
7391
7392
7393
7394
7395
7396
7397
7398
7399
7400
7401
7402
7403
7404
7405
7406
7407
7408
7409
7410
7411
7412
7413
7414
7415
7416
7417
7418
7419
7420
7421
7422
7423
7424
7425
7426
7427
7428
7429
7430
7431
7432
7433
7434
7435
7436
7437
7438
7439
7440
7441
7442
7443
7444
7445
7446
7447
7448
7449
7450
7451
7452
7453
7454
7455
7456
7457
7458
7459
7460
7461
7462
7463
7464
7465
7466
7467
7468
7469
7470
7471
7472
7473
7474
7475
7476
7477
7478
7479
7480
7481
7482
7483
7484
7485
7486
7487
7488
7489
7490
7491
7492
7493
7494
7495
7496
7497
7498
7499
7500
7501
7502
7503
7504
7505
7506
7507
7508
7509
7510
7511
7512
7513
7514
7515
7516
7517
7518
7519
7520
7521
7522
7523
7524
7525
7526
7527
7528
7529
7530
7531
7532
7533
7534
7535
7536
7537
7538
7539
7540
7541
7542
7543
7544
7545
7546
7547
7548
7549
7550
7551
7552
7553
7554
7555
7556
7557
7558
7559
7560
7561
7562
7563
7564
7565
7566
7567
7568
7569
7570
7571
7572
7573
7574
7575
7576
7577
7578
7579
7580
7581
7582
7583
7584
7585
7586
7587
7588
7589
7590
7591
7592
7593
7594
7595
7596
7597
7598
7599
7600
7601
7602
7603
7604
7605
7606
7607
7608
7609
7610
7611
7612
7613
7614
7615
7616
7617
7618
7619
7620
7621
7622
7623
7624
7625
7626
7627
7628
7629
7630
7631
7632
7633
7634
7635
7636
7637
7638
7639
7640
7641
7642
7643
7644
7645
7646
7647
7648
7649
7650
7651
7652
7653
7654
7655
7656
7657
7658
7659
7660
7661
7662
7663
7664
7665
7666
7667
7668
7669
7670
7671
7672
7673
7674
7675
7676
7677
7678
7679
7680
7681
7682
7683
7684
7685
7686
7687
7688
7689
7690
7691
7692
7693
7694
7695
7696
7697
7698
7699
7700
7701
7702
7703
7704
7705
7706
7707
7708
7709
7710
7711
7712
7713
7714
7715
7716
7717
7718
7719
7720
7721
7722
7723
7724
7725
7726
7727
7728
7729
7730
7731
7732
7733
7734
7735
7736
7737
7738
7739
7740
7741
7742
7743
7744
7745
7746
7747
7748
7749
7750
7751
7752
7753
7754
7755
7756
7757
7758
7759
7760
7761
7762
7763
7764
7765
7766
7767
7768
7769
7770
7771
7772
7773
7774
7775
7776
7777
7778
7779
7780
7781
7782
7783
7784
7785
7786
7787
7788
7789
7790
7791
7792
7793
7794
7795
7796
7797
7798
7799
7800
7801
7802
7803
7804
7805
7806
7807
7808
7809
7810
7811
7812
7813
7814
7815
7816
7817
7818
7819
7820
7821
7822
7823
7824
7825
7826
7827
7828
7829
7830
7831
7832
7833
7834
7835
7836
7837
7838
7839
7840
7841
7842
7843
7844
7845
7846
7847
7848
7849
7850
7851
7852
7853
7854
7855
7856
7857
7858
7859
7860
7861
7862
7863
7864
7865
7866
7867
7868
7869
7870
7871
7872
7873
7874
7875
7876
7877
7878
7879
7880
7881
7882
7883
7884
7885
7886
7887
7888
7889
7890
7891
7892
7893
7894
7895
7896
7897
7898
7899
7900
7901
7902
7903
7904
7905
7906
7907
7908
7909
7910
7911
7912
7913
7914
7915
7916
7917
7918
7919
7920
7921
7922
7923
7924
7925
7926
7927
7928
7929
7930
7931
7932
7933
7934
7935
7936
7937
7938
7939
7940
7941
7942
7943
7944
7945
7946
7947
7948
7949
7950
7951
7952
7953
7954
7955
7956
7957
7958
7959
7960
7961
7962
7963
7964
7965
7966
7967
7968
7969
7970
7971
7972
7973
7974
7975
7976
7977
7978
7979
7980
7981
7982
7983
7984
7985
7986
7987
7988
7989
7990
7991
7992
7993
7994
7995
7996
7997
7998
7999
8000
8001
8002
8003
8004
8005
8006
8007
8008
8009
8010
8011
8012
8013
8014
8015
8016
8017
8018
8019
8020
8021
8022
8023
8024
8025
8026
8027
8028
8029
8030
8031
8032
8033
8034
8035
8036
8037
8038
8039
8040
8041
8042
8043
8044
8045
8046
8047
8048
8049
8050
8051
8052
8053
8054
8055
8056
8057
8058
8059
8060
8061
8062
8063
8064
8065
8066
8067
8068
8069
8070
8071
8072
8073
8074
8075
8076
8077
8078
8079
8080
8081
8082
8083
8084
8085
8086
8087
8088
8089
8090
8091
8092
8093
8094
8095
8096
8097
8098
8099
8100
8101
8102
8103
8104
8105
8106
8107
8108
8109
8110
8111
8112
8113
8114
8115
8116
8117
8118
8119
8120
8121
8122
8123
8124
8125
8126
8127
8128
8129
8130
8131
8132
8133
8134
8135
8136
8137
8138
8139
8140
8141
8142
8143
8144
8145
8146
8147
8148
8149
8150
8151
8152
8153
8154
8155
8156
8157
8158
8159
8160
8161
8162
8163
8164
8165
8166
8167
8168
8169
8170
8171
8172
8173
8174
8175
8176
8177
8178
8179
8180
8181
8182
8183
8184
8185
8186
8187
8188
8189
8190
8191
8192
8193
8194
8195
8196
8197
8198
8199
8200
8201
8202
8203
8204
8205
8206
8207
8208
8209
8210
8211
8212
8213
8214
8215
8216
8217
8218
8219
8220
8221
8222
8223
8224
8225
8226
8227
8228
8229
8230
8231
8232
8233
8234
8235
8236
8237
8238
8239
8240
8241
8242
8243
8244
8245
8246
8247
8248
8249
8250
8251
8252
8253
8254
8255
8256
8257
8258
8259
8260
8261
8262
8263
8264
8265
8266
8267
8268
8269
8270
8271
8272
8273
8274
8275
8276
8277
8278
8279
8280
8281
8282
8283
8284
8285
8286
8287
8288
8289
8290
8291
8292
8293
8294
8295
8296
8297
8298
8299
8300
8301
8302
8303
8304
8305
8306
8307
8308
8309
8310
8311
8312
8313
8314
8315
8316
8317
8318
8319
8320
8321
8322
8323
8324
8325
8326
8327
8328
8329
8330
8331
8332
8333
8334
8335
8336
8337
8338
8339
8340
8341
8342
8343
8344
8345
8346
8347
8348
8349
8350
8351
8352
8353
8354
8355
8356
8357
8358
8359
|
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2 Final//EN">
<!--Converted with LaTeX2HTML 2002 (1.67)
original version by: Nikos Drakos, CBLU, University of Leeds
* revised and updated by: Marcus Hennecke, Ross Moore, Herb Swan
* with significant contributions from:
Jens Lippmann, Marek Rouchal, Martin Wilck and others -->
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>glossaries.sty v 2.05: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries</TITLE>
<META NAME="description" CONTENT="glossaries.sty v 2.05: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries">
<META NAME="keywords" CONTENT="glossaries-manual">
<META NAME="resource-type" CONTENT="document">
<META NAME="distribution" CONTENT="global">
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=utf-8">
<META NAME="Generator" CONTENT="LaTeX2HTML v2002">
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Style-Type" CONTENT="text/css">
</HEAD>
<BODY >
<A NAME="top"></A>
<P>
<P>
<H1 ALIGN="CENTER">glossaries.sty v 2.05: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries</H1>
<P ALIGN="CENTER"><STRONG>Nicola L.C. Talbot
<BR>
<BR>
School of Computing Sciences
<BR>
University of East Anglia
<BR>
Norwich. Norfolk
<BR>
NR4 7TJ. United Kingdom.
<BR><TT><A NAME="tex2html1"
HREF="http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/">http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/</A></TT></STRONG></P>
<P ALIGN="CENTER"><STRONG>6th Feb 2010</STRONG></P>
<BR>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION00010000000000000000">
Contents</A>
</H2>
<!--Table of Contents-->
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html91"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00020000000000000000">Introduction</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html92"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00021000000000000000">Sample Documents</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html93"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00022000000000000000">Multi-Lingual Support</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html94"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00022100000000000000">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html95"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00023000000000000000">Generating the Associated Glossary Files</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html96"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00023100000000000000">Using the makeglossaries Perl Script</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html97"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00023200000000000000">Using xindy explicitly</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html98"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00023300000000000000">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html99"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00023400000000000000">Note to Front-End and Script Developers</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html100"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00024000000000000000">Troubleshooting</A>
</UL>
<BR>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html101"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00030000000000000000">Overview of Main User Commands</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html102"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00031000000000000000">Package Options</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html103"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00032000000000000000">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html104"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00032100000000000000">Plurals</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html105"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00032200000000000000">Sub-Entries</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html106"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00032300000000000000">Loading Entries From a File</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html107"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00033000000000000000">Number lists</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html108"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00034000000000000000">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html109"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00034100000000000000">Changing the format of the link text</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html110"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00034200000000000000">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks to glossary entries</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html111"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00035000000000000000">Adding an Entry to the Glossary Without Generating Text</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html112"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00036000000000000000">Cross-Referencing Entries</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html113"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00037000000000000000">Using Glossary Terms Without Links</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html114"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00038000000000000000">Displaying a glossary</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html115"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00038100000000000000">Changing the way the entry name appears in the glossary</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html116"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00038200000000000000">Xindy</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html117"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00039000000000000000">Defining New Glossaries</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html118"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000310000000000000000">Acronyms</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html119"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000310100000000000000">Upgrading From the glossary Package</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html120"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000311000000000000000">Unsetting and Resetting Entry Flags</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html121"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000312000000000000000">Glossary Styles</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html122"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000312100000000000000">List Styles</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html123"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000312200000000000000">Longtable Styles</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html124"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000312300000000000000">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html125"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000312400000000000000">Supertabular Styles</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html126"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000312500000000000000">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html127"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000312600000000000000">Tree-Like Styles</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html128"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000313000000000000000">Defining your own glossary style</A>
<UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html129"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000313100000000000000">Example: creating a completely new style</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html130"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000313200000000000000">Example: creating a new glossary style based on an
existing style</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html131"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000313300000000000000">Example: creating a glossary style that uses the
user1, ..., user6 keys</A>
</UL>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html132"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION000314000000000000000">Accessibility Support</A>
</UL>
<BR>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html133"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00040000000000000000">Mfirstuc Package</A>
<LI><A NAME="tex2html134"
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#SECTION00050000000000000000">Index</A>
</UL>
<!--End of Table of Contents-->
<P>
<H1><A NAME="SECTION00020000000000000000">
Introduction</A>
</H1>
<P>
The <TT>glossaries</TT> package is provided to assist generating
glossaries. It has a certain amount of flexibility, allowing the
user to customize the format of the glossary and define multiple
glossaries. It also supports acronyms and glossary styles that
include symbols (in addition to a name and description) for glossary
entries. There is provision for loading a database of glossary terms.
Only those terms used<A NAME="tex2html2"
HREF="#foot4474"><SUP>1</SUP></A> in the document will be
added to the glossary.
<P>
<B>This package replaces the <TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="4545"></A> package which is
now obsolete.</B> Please see
<A NAME="tex2html3"
HREF="glossary2glossaries.html">Upgrading from the glossary package
to the glossaries package</A>
for assistance in upgrading.
<P>
One of the strengths of this package is its flexibility, however
the drawback of this is the necessity of having a large manual
that can cover all the various settings. If you are daunted by the
size of the manual, try starting off with the much shorter
<A NAME="tex2html4"
HREF="glossariesbegin.html">guide for beginners</A>.
<P>
The <TT>glossaries</TT> package comes with a
<A NAME="tex2html6"
HREF="http://www.perl.org/about.html">Perl</A>
script
called <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4549"></A>. This provides a convenient interface
to <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4552"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4555"></A>. It is strongly
recommended that you use this script, but <I>it is not
essential</I>. If you are reluctant to install Perl, or for any
other reason you don't want to use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4558"></A>, you
can called <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4561"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4564"></A> explicitly.
See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeglossaries">Generating the
Associated Glossary Files</A> for
further details.
<P>
This manual is structured as follows:
<UL>
<LI><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:overview">Overview of Main User Commands</A>
gives an overview of the main user commands and their syntax.
<P>
</LI>
<LI><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:mfirstuc">Mfirstuc</A>
describes the associated <TT>mfirstuc</TT> package.
<P>
</LI>
</UL>
The <A NAME="tex2html5"
HREF="glossaries.pdf">PDF version</A>
of
this manual also describes more advanced commands in the documented
code section (such as determining if an entry or a glossary exists
and commands that iterate through defined terms or glossaries).
<P>
The remainder of this introductory section covers the
following:
<UL>
<LI><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:samples">Sample
Documents</A> lists the sample documents provided
with this package.
<P>
</LI>
<LI><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:languages">Multi-Lingual
Support</A> provides information for users who
wish to write in a language other than English.
<P>
</LI>
<LI><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeglossaries">Generating
the Associated Glossary Files</A>
describes how to use a post-processor to create the sorted glossaries
for your document.
<P>
</LI>
<LI><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:trouble">Troubleshooting</A> provides some assistance in the event that you
encounter a problem.
</LI>
</UL>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION00021000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:samples"></A>
<BR>
Sample Documents
</H2>
<P>
The <TT>glossaries</TT> package is provided with some sample
documents that illustrate the various functions. These should
be located in the <TT>samples</TT> subdirectory (folder) of the
<TT>glossaries</TT> documentation directory. This location varies
according to your operating system and T<SMALL>E</SMALL>X distribution. You
can use <TT>texdoc</TT> to locate the main glossaries documentation.
For example, in a terminal or command prompt, type:
<PRE>
texdoc -l glossaries
</PRE>
This should display the full pathname of the file
<TT>glossaries.pdf</TT>. View the contents of that directory and
see if it contains the <TT>samples</TT> subdirectory.
<P>
If you can't find the sample files, they are available in the
subdirectory <TT>doc/latex/glossaries/samples/</TT> in the
<TT>glossaries.tds.zip</TT> archive which can be downloaded from
<A NAME="tex2html7"
HREF="http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries/">CTAN</A>.
<P>
The sample documents are as follows:
<DL>
<DT><STRONG>minimalgls.tex</STRONG></DT>
<DD><A NAME="ex:minimalgls"></A> This document is a minimal working example.
You can test your installation using this file. To create the
complete document you will need to do the following steps:
<OL>
<LI>Run <TT>minimalgls.tex</TT> through LaTeX either by
typing
<PRE>
latex minimalgls
</PRE>
in a terminal or by using the relevant button or menu item in
your text editor or front-end. This will create the required
associated files but you will not see the glossary. If you use
PDFLaTeX you will also get warnings about non-existent
references. These warnings may be ignored on the first run.
<P>
If you get a <code>Missing \begin{document}</code> error, then
it's most likely that your version of <TT>xkeyval</TT><A NAME="4574"></A> is
out of date. Check the log file for a warning of that nature.
If this is the case, you will need to update the <TT>xkeyval</TT>
package.
<P>
</LI>
<LI>Run <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4578"></A> on the document. This can
be done on a terminal either by typing
<PRE>
makeglossaries minimalgls
</PRE>
or by typing
<PRE>
perl makeglossaries minimalgls
</PRE>
If your system doesn't recognise the command <TT>perl</TT> then
it's likely you don't have Perl installed. In which case you
will need to use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4581"></A> directly. You can do this
in a terminal by typing (all on one line):
<PRE>
makeindex -s minimalgls.ist -t minimalgls.glg -o minimalgls.gls
minimalgls.glo
</PRE>
(See
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeindexapp">later</A>
for further details on using <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4584"></A> explicitly.)
<P>
Note that if you need to specify the full path and the path
contains spaces, you will need to delimit the file names with
the double-quote character.
<P>
</LI>
<LI>Run <TT>minimalgls.tex</TT> through LaTeX again (as step 1)
</LI>
</OL>
You should now have a complete document. The number following
each entry in the glossary is the location number. By default, this
is the page number where the entry was referenced.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>sample4col.tex</STRONG></DT>
<DD><A NAME="ex:sample4col"></A> This document illustrates a four column
glossary where the entries have a symbol in addition to the
name and description. To create the complete document, you need
to do:
<PRE>
latex sample4col
makeglossaries sample4col
latex sample4col
</PRE>
As before, if you don't have Perl installed, you will need to
use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4587"></A> directly instead of using
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4590"></A>. The vertical gap between entries
is the gap created at the start of each group. This can be
suppressed by redefining <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT><A NAME="4593"></A> after the glossary
style has been set:
<PRE>
\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}
</PRE>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>sampleAcr.tex</STRONG></DT>
<DD><A NAME="ex:sampleAcr"></A> This document has some sample acronyms. It
also adds the glossary to the table of contents, so an extra
run through LaTeX is required to ensure the document is up to date:
<PRE>
latex sampleAcr
makeglossaries sampleAcr
latex sampleAcr
latex sampleAcr
</PRE>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>sampleAcrDesc.tex</STRONG></DT>
<DD><A NAME="ex:sampleAcrDesc"></A> This is similar to the previous example,
except that the acronyms have an associated description. As with
the previous example, the glossary is added to the table of
contents, so an extra run through LaTeX is required:
<PRE>
latex sampleAcrDesc
makeglossaries sampleAcrDesc
latex sampleAcrDesc
latex sampleAcrDesc
</PRE>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>sampleDesc.tex</STRONG></DT>
<DD><A NAME="ex:sampleDesc"></A> This is similar to the previous example,
except that it defines the acronyms using <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="4596"></A>
instead of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="4599"></A>. As with
the previous example, the glossary is added to the table of
contents, so an extra run through LaTeX is required:
<PRE>
latex sampleDesc
makeglossaries sampleDesc
latex sampleDesc
latex sampleDesc
</PRE>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>sampleDB.tex</STRONG></DT>
<DD><A NAME="ex:sampleDB"></A> This document illustrates how to load
external files containing the glossary definitions. It also
illustrates how to define a new glossary type. This document
has the number list<A NAME="4601"></A> suppressed and uses <TT>\glsaddall</TT><A NAME="4603"></A> to add
all the entries to the glossaries without referencing each one
explicitly. To create the document do:
<PRE>
latex sampleDB
makeglossaries sampleDB
latex sampleDB
</PRE>
The glossary definitions are stored in the accompanying files
<TT>database1.tex</TT> and <TT>database2.tex</TT>. Note that if
you don't have Perl installed, you will need to use
<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4606"></A> twice instead of a single call to
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4609"></A>:
<OL>
<LI>Create the main glossary:
<PRE>
makeindex -s sampleDB.ist -t sampleDB.glg -o sampleDB.gls sampleDB.glo
</PRE>
</LI>
<LI>Create the secondary glossary:
<PRE>
makeindex -s sampleDB.ist -t sampleDB.nlg -o sampleDB.not sampleDB.ntn
</PRE>
</LI>
</OL>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>sampleEq.tex</STRONG></DT>
<DD><A NAME="ex:sampleEq"></A> This document illustrates how to change the
location to something other than the page number. In this case,
the <TT>equation</TT> counter is used since all glossary entries
appear inside an <TT>equation</TT> environment. To create the
document do:
<PRE>
latex sampleEq
makeglossaries sampleEq
latex sampleEq
</PRE>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>sampleEqPg.tex</STRONG></DT>
<DD><A NAME="ex:sampleEqPg"></A> This is similar to the previous example,
but the number lists<A NAME="4612"></A> are a mixture of page
numbers and equation numbers. This example adds the glossary to the
table of contents, so an extra LaTeX run is required:
<PRE>
latex sampleEqPg
makeglossaries sampleEqPg
latex sampleEqPg
latex sampleEqPg
</PRE>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>sampleSec.tex</STRONG></DT>
<DD><A NAME="ex:sampleSec"></A> This document also illustrates how to change
the location to something other than the page number. In this case,
the <TT>section</TT> counter is used. This example adds the
glossary to the table of contents, so an extra LaTeX run is
required:
<PRE>
latex sampleSec
makeglossaries sampleSec
latex sampleSec
latex sampleSec
</PRE>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>sampleNtn.tex</STRONG></DT>
<DD><A NAME="ex:sampleNtn"></A> This document illustrates how to create
an additional glossary type. This example adds the glossary to the
table of contents, so an extra LaTeX run is required:
<PRE>
latex sampleNtn
makeglossaries sampleNtn
latex sampleNtn
latex sampleNtn
</PRE>
Note that if you don't have Perl installed, you will need to use
<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4614"></A> twice instead of a single call to
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4617"></A>:
<OL>
<LI>Create the main glossary:
<PRE>
makeindex -s sampleNtn.ist -t sampleNtn.glg -o sampleNtn.gls sampleNtn.glo
</PRE>
</LI>
<LI>Create the secondary glossary:
<PRE>
makeindex -s sampleNtn.ist -t sampleNtn.nlg -o sampleNtn.not sampleNtn.ntn
</PRE>
</LI>
</OL>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>sample.tex</STRONG></DT>
<DD><A NAME="ex:sample"></A> This document illustrates some of the basics,
including how to create child entries that use the same name as the
parent entry. This example adds the glossary to the table of
contents, so an extra LaTeX run is required:
<PRE>
latex sample
makeglossaries sample
latex sample
latex sample
</PRE>
You can see the difference between word and letter ordering
if you substitute <TT>order=word</TT><A NAME="4627"></A> with
<TT>order=letter</TT><A NAME="4636"></A>. (Note that this will only have an
effect if you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4638"></A>. If you use
<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4641"></A> explicitly, you will need to use the
<TT>-l</TT> switch to indicate letter ordering.)
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>sampletree.tex</STRONG></DT>
<DD><A NAME="ex:sampletree"></A> This document illustrates a hierarchical
glossary structure where child entries have different names
to their corresponding parent entry. To create the document do:
<PRE>
latex sampletree
makeglossaries sampletree
latex sampletree
</PRE>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>samplexdy.tex</STRONG></DT>
<DD><A NAME="ex:samplexdy"></A> This document illustrates how to use the
<TT>glossaries</TT> package with <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4645"></A> instead of
<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4648"></A>. The document uses UTF8 encoding (with the
<TT>inputenc</TT><A NAME="4651"></A> package). The encoding is picked up by
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4654"></A>. By default, this document will create
a <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4657"></A> style file called <TT>samplexdy.xdy</TT>, but
if you uncomment the lines
<PRE>
\setStyleFile{samplexdy-mc}
\noist
\GlsSetXdyLanguage{}
</PRE>
it will set the style file to <TT>samplexdy-mc.xdy</TT> instead.
This provides an additional letter group for entries starting
with "Mc" or "Mac". If you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4660"></A>,
you don't need to supply any additional information. If you
don't use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4663"></A>, you will need to specify the
required information. Note that if you set the style file to
<TT>samplexdy-mc.xdy</TT> you must also specify <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="4666"></A>,
otherwise the <TT>glossaries</TT> package will overwrite
<TT>samplexdy-mc.xdy</TT> and you will lose the "Mc" letter group.
<P>
To create the document do:
<PRE>
latex samplexdy
makeglossaries samplexdy
latex samplexdy
</PRE>
If you don't have Perl installed, you will have to call
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4670"></A> explicitly instead of using <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4673"></A>.
If you are using the default style file <TT>samplexdy.xdy</TT>, then
do (no line breaks):
<PRE>
xindy -L english -C utf8 -I xindy -M samplexdy -t samplexdy.glg
-o samplexdy.gls samplexdy.glo
</PRE>
otherwise, if you are using <TT>samplexdy-mc.xdy</TT>, then do
(no line breaks):
<PRE>
xindy -I xindy -M samplexdy-mc -t samplexdy.glg -o samplexdy.gls
samplexdy.glo
</PRE>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>sampleutf8.tex</STRONG></DT>
<DD><A NAME="ex:sampleutf8"></A> This is another example that uses
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4676"></A>. Unlike <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4679"></A>, <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4682"></A> can
cope with accented or non-Latin characters. This document uses
UTF8 encoding. To create the document do:
<PRE>
latex sampleutf8
makeglossaries sampleutf8
latex sampleutf8
</PRE>
If you don't have Perl installed, you will have to call
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4685"></A> explicitly instead of using <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4688"></A>
(no line breaks):
<PRE>
xindy -L english -C utf8 -I xindy -M sampleutf8 -t sampleutf8.glg
-o sampleutf8.gls sampleutf8.glo
</PRE>
<P>
If you remove the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4696"></A> option from <TT>sampleutf8.tex</TT>
and do:
<PRE>
latex sampleutf8
makeglossaries sampleutf8
latex sampleutf8
</PRE>
you will see that the entries that start with a non-Latin character
now appear in the symbols group, and the word "manœuvre" is now
after "manor" instead of before it. If you are unable to use
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4700"></A>, the call to <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4703"></A> is as
follows (no line breaks):
<PRE>
makeindex -s sampleutf8.ist -t sampleutf8.glg -o sampleutf8.gls
sampleutf8.glo
</PRE>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>sampleaccsupp.tex</STRONG></DT>
<DD><A NAME="ex:sampleaccsupp"></A> This document
uses the experimental <TT>glossaries-accsupp</TT><A NAME="4706"></A> package. The
symbol is set to the replacement text. Note that some PDF
viewers don't use the accessibility support. Information
about the <TT>glossaries-accsupp</TT> package can be found in
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:accsupp">"Accessibility Support"</A>.
<P>
</DD>
</DL>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION00022000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:languages"></A>
<BR>
Multi-Lingual Support
</H2>
<P>
As from version 1.17, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package can now be
used with <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4714"></A> as well as <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4717"></A>. If you
are writing in a language that uses accented characters or
non-Latin characters it is recommended that you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4720"></A>
as <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4723"></A> is hard-coded for Latin languages. This
means that you are not restricted to the A, ..., Z letter groups.
If you want to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4726"></A>, remember to use the
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4734"></A> package option. For example:
<PRE>
\documentclass[frenchb]{article}
\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage{babel}
\usepackage[xindy]{glossaries}
</PRE>
<P>
If you use an accented or other expandable character at the start of
an entry name, you must place it in a group, or it will cause
a problem for commands that convert the first letter to uppercase
(e.g. <TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="4738"></A>) due to expansion issues. For example:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{é}lite},
description={select group or class}}
</PRE>
<P>
If you use the <TT>inputenc</TT><A NAME="4741"></A> package, <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4744"></A>
will pick up the encoding from the auxiliary file. If you use
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4747"></A> explicitly instead of via <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4750"></A>,
you may need to specify the encoding using the <TT>-C</TT>
option. Read the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4753"></A> manual for further details.
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION00022100000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:fixednames"></A>
<BR>
Changing the Fixed Names
</H3>
<P>
As from version 1.08, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package now has
limited multi-lingual support, thanks to all the people who have sent
me the relevant translations either via email or via
<TT>comp.text.tex</TT>.
However you must load <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="4757"></A> or <TT>polyglossia</TT><A NAME="4760"></A> <I>before</I>
<TT>glossaries</TT> to enable this. Note that if <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="4764"></A> is loaded
and the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4767"></A> package is detected on T<SMALL>E</SMALL>X's path, then the
<TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4770"></A> package will be loaded automatically. However,
it may not pick up on the required languages so, if the predefined
text is not translated, you may need to explicitly load the
<TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4773"></A> package with the required languages. For example:
<PRE>
\usepackage[spanish]{babel}
\usepackage[spanish]{translator}
\usepackage{glossaries}
</PRE>
Alternatively, specify the language as a class option rather
than a package option. For example:
<PRE>
\documentclass[spanish]{report}
\usepackage{babel}
\usepackage{glossaries}
</PRE>
<P>
If you want to use <TT>ngerman</TT><A NAME="4776"></A> or <TT>german</TT><A NAME="4779"></A> instead
of <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="4782"></A>, you will need to include the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4785"></A> package
to provide the translations. For example:
<PRE>
\documentclass[ngerman]{article}
\usepackage{ngerman}
\usepackage{translator}
\usepackage{glossaries}
</PRE>
<P>
The following languages are currently supported by the
<TT>glossaries</TT> package:
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
<TABLE CELLPADDING=3>
<TR><TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Language </B></TH>
<TH ALIGN="CENTER"><B>As from version</B></TH>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT">Brazilian Portuguese</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1.17</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT">Danish</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1.08</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT">Dutch</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1.08</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT">English</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1.08</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT">French</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1.08</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT">German</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1.08</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT">Irish</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1.08</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT">Italian</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1.08</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT">Hungarian</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1.08</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT">Polish</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1.13</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT">Spanish</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1.08</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</DIV>
The language dependent commands and <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4789"></A> keys used by the
glossaries package are listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:predefinednames">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:predefinednames">1</A>.
<P>
<BR><P></P>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
<A NAME="tab:predefinednames"></A>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
<A NAME="553"></A>
<TABLE CELLPADDING=3>
<CAPTION><STRONG>Table 1:</STRONG>
Customised Text</CAPTION>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Command Name </B></TH>
<TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Translator Key Word </B></TH>
<TH ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200><B>Purpose</B></TH>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glossaryname</TT><A NAME="4795"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Glossary</TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Title of the main glossary.</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acronymname</TT><A NAME="4798"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Acronyms</TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Title of the list of acronyms
(when used with package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="4806"></A>).</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\entryname</TT><A NAME="4810"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Notation (glossaries)</TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for first column in the glossary (for 2, 3 or 4 column glossaries
that support headers).</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\descriptionname</TT><A NAME="4813"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Description (glossaries)</TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for second column in the glossary (for 2, 3 or 4 column glossaries
that support headers).</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\symbolname</TT><A NAME="4816"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Symbol (glossaries)</TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for symbol
column in the glossary for glossary styles that support this option.</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\pagelistname</TT><A NAME="4819"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Page List (glossaries)</TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for page list column in the glossary for glossaries that support
this option.</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glssymbolsgroupname</TT><A NAME="4822"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Symbols (glossaries)</TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for symbols section of the glossary for glossary styles that
support this option.</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glsnumbersgroupname</TT><A NAME="4825"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>Numbers (glossaries)</TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT" VALIGN="TOP" WIDTH=200>Header for
numbers section of the glossary for glossary styles that support
this option.</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR>
</TABLE>
</DIV>
</DIV>
<BR>
<P>
Due to the varied nature of glossaries, it's likely that the
predefined translations may not be appropriate. If you are using
the <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="4828"></A> package and do not have the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4831"></A> package
installed, you need to be familiar with the
advice on <A NAME="tex2html10"
HREF="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=latexwords">changing the words babel uses</A>.
If you have the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4834"></A> package installed, then you can
provide your own dictionary with the necessary modifications
(using <TT>\deftranslation</TT>) and load it using
<TT>\usedictionary</TT>. Note that the dictionaries are loaded at the
beginning of the document, so it won't have any effect if you
put <TT>\deftranslation</TT> in the preamble. It should be put in your
personal dictionary instead. See the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4837"></A>
documentation for further details.
<P>
If you are using <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="4840"></A> and don't want to use the
<TT>translator</TT><A NAME="4843"></A> interface, you can suppress it using the package
option <TT>translate=false</TT><A NAME="4853"></A>, and either load
<TT>glossaries-babel</TT><A NAME="4855"></A> after <TT>glossaries</TT> or specify you're own
translations. For example:
<PRE>
\documentclass[british]{article}
\usepackage{babel}
\usepackage[translate=false]{glossaries}
\usepackage{glossaries-babel}
</PRE>
or:
<PRE>
\documentclass[british]{article}
\usepackage{babel}
\usepackage[translate=false]{glossaries}
\addto\captionsbritish{%
\renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{List of Terms}%
\renewcommand*{\acronymname}{List of Acronyms}%
\renewcommand*{\entryname}{Notation}%
\renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}%
\renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}%
\renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}%
\renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}%
\renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}%
}
</PRE>
<P>
If you are using <TT>polyglossia</TT><A NAME="4859"></A> instead of <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="4862"></A>,
<TT>glossaries-polyglossia</TT><A NAME="4865"></A> will automatically be loaded unless
you specify the package option <TT>translate=false</TT><A NAME="4875"></A>.
<P>
Note that <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4877"></A> provides much better multi-lingual
support than <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4880"></A>, so it's recommended that you
use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4883"></A> if you have glossary entries that contain
accented characters or non-Roman letters. See
<A NAME="tex2html11"
HREF="sec:xindy">Xindy</A>
for further details.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION00023000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:makeglossaries"></A>
<BR>
Generating the Associated Glossary Files
</H2>
<P>
In order to generate a sorted glossary with compact location lists,
it is necessary to use an external indexing application as an
intermediate step. It is this application that creates the file
containing the code that typesets the glossary. If this step
is omitted, the glossaries will not appear in your document. The
two indexing applications that are most commonly used with
LaTeX are <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4889"></A> and <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4892"></A>. As
from version 1.17, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package can be used
with either of these applications. Previous versions were designed
to be used with <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4896"></A> only. Note that
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4899"></A> has much better multi-lingual support than
<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4902"></A>, so <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4905"></A> is recommended if you're
not writing in English. Commands that only have an
effect when <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4908"></A> is used are described
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:xindy">later</A>.
<P>
The <TT>glossaries</TT> package comes with the Perl script
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4912"></A> which will run <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4915"></A> or
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4918"></A> on all the glossary files using a customized style
file (which is created by <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4921"></A>). See
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeglossariesapp">Using the
makeglossaries Perl script</A> for further
details. Perl is stable, cross-platform, open source software that
is used by a number of T<SMALL>E</SMALL>X-related applications. Further
information is available at <TT><A NAME="tex2html12"
HREF="http://www.perl.org/about.html">http://www.perl.org/about.html</A></TT>.
However, whilst it is strongly recommended that you use the
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4924"></A> script, it is possible to use the
<TT>glossaries</TT> package without having Perl installed. In which
case, if you have used the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4933"></A> package option, you will
need to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4937"></A> (see
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:xindyapp">Using xindy
explicitly</A>), otherwise you will need to use
<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4940"></A> (see
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeindexapp">Using makeindex
explicitly</A>). Note that some commands and
package options have no effect if you don't use
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4943"></A>. These are listed in
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:makeglossariesCmds">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:makeglossariesCmds">2</A>.
<P>
Note that if any of your entries use an entry
that is not referenced outside the glossary, you will need to
do an additional <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4949"></A>, <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4952"></A>
or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4955"></A> run, as appropriate. For example,
suppose you have defined the following entries:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{citrusfruit}{name={citrus fruit},
description={fruit of any citrus tree. (See also
\gls{orange})}}
\newglossaryentry{orange}{name={orange},
description={an orange coloured fruit.}}
</PRE>
and suppose you have <code>\gls{citrusfruit}</code> in your document
but don't reference the <TT>orange</TT> entry, then the
<TT>orange</TT> entry won't appear in your glossary until
you first create the glossary and then do another run
of <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4958"></A>, <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4961"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4964"></A>.
For example, if the document is called <TT>myDoc.tex</TT>, then
you must do:
<PRE>
latex myDoc
makeglossaries myDoc
latex myDoc
makeglossaries myDoc
latex myDoc
</PRE>
<P>
Likewise, an additional <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4967"></A> and LaTeX run
may be required if the document pages shift with re-runs. For
example, if the page numbering is not reset after the table of
contents, the insertion of the table of contents on the second
LaTeX run may push glossary entries across page boundaries, which
means that the number lists<A NAME="4969"></A> in the glossary may
need updating.
<P>
The examples in this document assume that you are accessing
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="4971"></A>, <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4974"></A> or <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4977"></A> via
a terminal. Windows users can use the MSDOS Prompt which
is usually accessed via the
<I>Start</I>-><I>All Programs</I>
menu or
<I>Start</I>-><I>All Programs</I>-><I>Accessories</I>
menu. Alternatively, your text editor may have the
facility to create a function that will call the
required application. See your editor's user manual for further
details.
<P>
If any problems occur, remember to check the transcript files
(e.g. <TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="4980"></A> or <TT>.alg</TT><A NAME="4982"></A>) for messages.
<P>
<BR><P></P>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
<A NAME="tab:makeglossariesCmds"></A><A NAME="4228"></A>
<TABLE CELLPADDING=3>
<CAPTION><STRONG>Table 2:</STRONG>
Commands and package options that have no effect when
using <TT>xindy</TT> or <TT>makeindex</TT> explicity</CAPTION>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Command or Package Option </B></TH>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="4984"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="4987"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>order=letter</TT><A NAME="4997"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">use <TT>-l</TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">use <TT>-M ord/letorder</TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>order=word</TT><A NAME="5006"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">default</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">default</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5013"></A>={<TT>language=</TT><I>lang</I><TT>,codename=</TT><I>code</I>}</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">N/A</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">use <TT>-L</TT> <I>lang</I> <TT>-C</TT> <I>code</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\GlsSetXdyLanguage</TT><A NAME="5019"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>lang</EM><TT>}</TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">N/A</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">use <TT>-L</TT> <I>lang</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\GlsSetXdyCodePage</TT><A NAME="5022"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>code</EM><TT>}</TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">N/A</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">use <TT>-C</TT> <I>code</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD></TR>
</TABLE>
<P>
</DIV>
<BR>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION00023100000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:makeglossariesapp"></A>
<BR>
Using the makeglossaries Perl Script
</H3>
<P>
The <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5028"></A> script picks up the relevant
information from the auxiliary (<TT>.aux</TT><A NAME="5031"></A>) file and
will either call <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5033"></A> or <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5036"></A>,
depending on the supplied information. Therefore, you only need to
pass the document's name without the extension to
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5039"></A>.
For example, if your document is called <TT>myDoc.tex</TT>,
type the following in your terminal:
<PRE>
latex myDoc
makeglossaries myDoc
latex myDoc
</PRE>
You may need to explicitly load <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5042"></A> into
Perl:
<PRE>
perl makeglossaries myDoc
</PRE>
There is a batch file called <TT>makeglossaries.bat</TT> which
does this for Windows users, but you must have Perl installed to
be able to use it.
<P>
The <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5045"></A> script contains POD (Plain Old
Documentation). If you want, you can create a man page for
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5048"></A> using <TT>pod2man</TT><A NAME="5051"></A> and move the
resulting file onto the man path.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION00023200000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:xindyapp"></A>
<BR>
Using xindy explicitly
</H3>
<P>
If you want to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5057"></A> to process the glossary
files, you must make sure you have used the
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5065"></A> package option:
<PRE>
\usepackage[xindy]{glossaries}
</PRE>
This is required regardless of whether you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5069"></A>
explicitly or whether it's called implicitly via
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5072"></A>. This causes the glossary
entries to be written in raw <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5075"></A> format, so you need to
use <TT>-I xindy</TT> <I>not</I> <TT>-I tex</TT>.
<P>
To run <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5078"></A> type the following in your terminal
(all on one line):
<BR>
<BR><TT>xindy -L </TT> <I>language</I><TT> -C </TT> <I>encoding</I><TT> -I xindy
-M </TT> <I>style</I><TT> -t </TT> <I>base</I><TT>.glg
<BR>
-o </TT> <I>base</I><TT>.gls </TT> <I>base</I><TT>.glo
</TT>
<BR>
<BR>
where <I>language</I> is the required language name, <I>encoding</I>
is the encoding, <I>base</I> is the name of the document without the
<TT>.tex</TT><A NAME="5081"></A> extension and <I>style</I> is the name of the
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5083"></A> style file without the <TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="5086"></A> extension.
The default name for this style file is <I>base</I><TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="5088"></A>
but can be changed via <TT>\setStyleFile</TT><A NAME="5090"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>style</EM><TT>}</TT>. You may need
to specify the full path name depending on the current working
directory. If any of the file names contain spaces, you must delimit
them using double-quotes.
<P>
For example, if your document is called <TT>myDoc.tex</TT> and
you are using UTF8 encoding in English, then type the
following in your terminal:
<PRE>
xindy -L english -C utf8 -I xindy -M myDoc -t myDoc.glg -o myDoc.gls myDoc.glo
</PRE>
<P>
Note that this just creates the main glossary. You need to do
the same for each of the other glossaries (including the
list of acronyms if you have used the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5098"></A>
package option), substituting <TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="5102"></A>, <TT>.gls</TT><A NAME="5104"></A>
and <TT>.glo</TT><A NAME="5106"></A> with the relevant extensions. For example,
if you have used the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5113"></A> package option, then
you would need to do:
<PRE>
xindy -L english -C utf8 -I xindy -M myDoc -t myDoc.alg -o myDoc.acr myDoc.acn
</PRE>
For additional glossaries, the extensions are those supplied
when you created the glossary with <TT>\newglossary</TT><A NAME="5117"></A>.
<P>
Note that if you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5120"></A> instead, you can
replace all those calls to <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5123"></A> with just one call
to <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5126"></A>:
<PRE>
makeglossaries myDoc
</PRE>
Note also that some commands and package options have no effect if
you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5129"></A> explicitly instead of using
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5132"></A>. These are listed in
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:makeglossariesCmds">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:makeglossariesCmds">2</A>.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION00023300000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:makeindexapp"></A>
<BR>
Using makeindex explicitly
</H3>
<P>
If you want to use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5141"></A> explicitly, you must
make sure that you haven't used the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5149"></A> package
option or the glossary entries will be written in the wrong
format. To run <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5153"></A>, type the following in
your terminal:
<BR>
<BR><TT>makeindex -s </TT> <I>style</I><TT>.ist -t </TT> <I>base</I><TT>.glg
-o </TT> <I>base</I><TT>.gls </TT> <I>base</I><TT>.glo
</TT>
<BR>
<BR>
where <I>base</I> is the name of your document without the
<TT>.tex</TT><A NAME="5156"></A> extension and <I>style</I><TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="5158"></A> is the
name of the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5160"></A> style file. By default, this is
<I>base</I><TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="5163"></A>, but may be changed via
<TT>\setStyleFile</TT><A NAME="5165"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>style</EM><TT>}</TT>. Note that there are other options,
such as <TT>-l</TT> (letter ordering). See the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5168"></A>
manual for further details.
<P>
For example, if your document is called <TT>myDoc.tex</TT>, then
type the following at the terminal:
<PRE>
makeindex -s myDoc.ist -t myDoc.glg -o myDoc.gls myDoc.glo
</PRE>
Note that this only creates the main glossary. If you have
additional glossaries (for example, if you have used the
<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5176"></A> package option) then you must call
<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5180"></A> for each glossary, substituting
<TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="5183"></A>, <TT>.gls</TT><A NAME="5185"></A> and <TT>.glo</TT><A NAME="5187"></A> with the
relevant extensions. For example, if you have used the
<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5194"></A> package option, then you need to type the
following in your terminal:
<PRE>
makeindex -s myDoc.ist -t myDoc.alg -o myDoc.acr myDoc.acn
</PRE>
For additional glossaries, the extensions are those supplied
when you created the glossary with <TT>\newglossary</TT><A NAME="5198"></A>.
<P>
Note that if you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5201"></A> instead, you can
replace all those calls to <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5204"></A> with just one call
to <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5207"></A>:
<PRE>
makeglossaries myDoc
</PRE>
Note also that some commands and package options have no effect if
you use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5210"></A> explicitly instead of using
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5213"></A>. These are listed in
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:makeglossariesCmds">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:makeglossariesCmds">2</A>.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION00023400000000000000">
Note to Front-End and Script Developers</A>
</H3>
<P>
The information needed to determine whether to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5222"></A>
or <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5225"></A> and the information needed to call those
applications is stored in the auxiliary file. This information can
be gathered by a front-end, editor or script to make the glossaries
where appropriate. This section describes how the information is
stored in the auxiliary file.
<P>
The file extensions used by each defined glossary are given by
<BR>
<BR><TT>\@newglossary{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>log</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>out-ext</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>in-ext</EM><TT>}</TT>
<BR>
<BR>
where <I>in-ext</I> is the extension of the <I>indexing
application's</I> input file (the output file from the <TT>glossaries</TT>
package's point of view), <I>out-ext</I> is the extension of the
<I>indexing application's</I> output file (the input file from
the <TT>glossaries</TT> package's point of view) and <I>log</I> is the
extension of the indexing application's transcript file. The label
for the glossary is also given for information purposes only, but
is not required by the indexing applications. For example, the
information for the main glossary is written as:
<PRE>
\@newglossary{main}{glg}{gls}{glo}
</PRE>
<P>
The indexing application's style file is specified by
<BR>
<BR><TT>\@istfilename{</TT><EM>filename</EM><TT>}</TT>
<BR>
<BR>
The file extension indicates whether to use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5230"></A>
(<TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="5233"></A>) or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5235"></A> (<TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="5238"></A>). Note that
the glossary information is formatted differently depending on
which indexing application is supposed to be used, so it's
important to call the correct one.
<P>
Word or letter ordering is specified by:
<BR>
<BR><TT>\@glsorder{</TT><EM>order</EM><TT>}</TT>
<BR>
<BR>
where <I>order</I> can be either <TT>word</TT> or <TT>letter</TT>.
<P>
If <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5240"></A> should be used, the language and code page
for each glossary is specified by
<BR>
<BR><TT>\@xdylanguage{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>language</EM><TT>}</TT>
<BR><TT>\@gls@codepage{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>code</EM><TT>}</TT>
<BR>
<BR>
where <I>label</I> identifies the glossary, <I>language</I> is
the root language (e.g. <TT>english</TT>) and <I>code</I>
is the encoding (e.g. <TT>utf8</TT>). These commands are omitted
if <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5243"></A> should be used.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION00024000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:trouble"></A>
<BR>
Troubleshooting
</H2>
<P>
The <TT>glossaries</TT> package comes with a minimal file called
<TT>minimalgls.tex</TT> which can be used for testing. This
should be located in the <TT>samples</TT> subdirectory (folder)
of the <TT>glossaries</TT> documentation directory. The location
varies according to your operating system and T<SMALL>E</SMALL>X installation.
For example, on my Linux partition it can be found in
<TT>/usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/</TT>.
Further information on debugging LaTeX code is available at
<TT><A NAME="tex2html14"
HREF="http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/minexample/">http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/minexample/</A></TT>.
<P>
Below is a list of the most frequently asked questions. For
other queries, consult the <TT>glossaries</TT> FAQ at
<TT><A NAME="tex2html15"
HREF="http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/glossariesfaq.html">http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/latex/packages/faq/glossariesfaq.html</A></TT>.
<P>
<OL>
<LI><B>Q.</B> I get the error message:
<PRE>
Missing \begin{document}
</PRE>
<P>
<B>A.</B> Check you are using an up to date version of the <TT>xkeyval</TT><A NAME="5252"></A>
package.
<P>
</LI>
<LI><B>Q.</B> I've used the <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="5260"></A> option, but the acronyms
are displayed in normal sized upper case letters.
<P>
<B>A.</B> The <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="5269"></A> package option uses <TT>\textsc</TT> to typeset
the acronyms. This command converts lower case letters to small
capitals, while upper case letters remain their usual size. Therefore
you need to specify the acronym in lower case letters.
<P>
</LI>
<LI><B>Q.</B> My acronyms won't break across a line when they're
expanded.
<P>
<B>A.</B> PDFLaTeX can break hyperlinks across a line, but
LaTeX can't. If you can't use PDFLaTeX then disable the first use
links using the package option <TT>hyperfirst=false</TT><A NAME="5280"></A>.
<P>
</LI>
<LI><B>Q.</B> How do I change the font that the acronyms are displayed in?
<P>
<B>A.</B> The easiest way to do this is to specify the <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="5287"></A> package
option and redefine <TT>\acronymfont</TT> to use the required typesetting
command. For example, suppose you would like the acronyms displayed in
a sans-serif font, then you can do:
<PRE>
\usepackage[smaller]{glossaries}
\renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
</PRE>
<P>
</LI>
<LI><B>Q.</B> How do I change the font that the acronyms are displayed in
on first use<A NAME="5290"></A>?
<P>
<B>A.</B> The easiest way to do this is to specify the <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="5297"></A> package
option and redefine <TT>\firstacronymfont</TT> to use the required
command. Note that if you don't want the acronym on subsequent use
to use <TT>\textsmaller</TT>, you will also need to redefine <TT>\acronymfont</TT>,
as above. For example to make the acronym emphasized on
first use<A NAME="5300"></A>, but use the surrounding font for subsequent use, you can do:
<PRE>
\usepackage[smaller]{glossaries}
\renewcommand*{\firstacronymfont}[1]{\emph{#1}}
\renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{#1}
</PRE>
<P>
</LI>
<LI><B>Q.</B> I don't have Perl installed, do I have to use
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5302"></A>?
<P>
<B>A.</B> Although it is strongly recommended that you use
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5305"></A>, you don't have to use it.
For further details, read
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:xindyapp">Using
xindy explicitly</A> or
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeindexapp">Using
makeindex explicitly</A>, depending on
whether you want to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5308"></A> or <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5311"></A>.
<P>
</LI>
<LI><B>Q.</B> I'm used to using the <TT>glossary</TT> package: are there any
instructions on migrating from the <TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="5315"></A> package to the
<TT>glossaries</TT> package?
<P>
<B>A.</B> Read <A NAME="tex2html16"
HREF="glossary2glossaries.html">Upgrading
from the glossary package to the glossaries
package</A> which should be available from the
same location as this document.
<P>
</LI>
<LI><B>Q.</B> I'm using <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="5319"></A> but the fixed names haven't been
translated.
<P>
<B>A.</B> The <TT>glossaries</TT> package currently only supports the following
languages: Brazilian Portuguese, Danish, Dutch, English, French,
German, Irish, Italian, Hungarian, Polish and Spanish. If you want
to add another language, send me the translations, and I'll add them
to the next version.
<P>
If you are using one of the above languages, but the text hasn't been
translated, try adding the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="5323"></A> package with the
required languages explicitly (before you load the <TT>glossaries</TT>
package). For example:
<PRE>
\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
\usepackage[ngerman]{translator}
\usepackage{glossaries}
</PRE>
Alternatively, you can add the language as a global option
to the class file. Check the <TT>translator</TT> package documentation
for further details.
<P>
</LI>
<LI><B>Q.</B> My acronyms contain strange characters when I use commands
like <TT>\acrlong</TT><A NAME="5328"></A>.
<P>
<B>A.</B> Switch off the sanitization:
<PRE>
\usepackage[sanitize=none]{glossaries}
</PRE>
and protect fragile commands.
<P>
</LI>
<LI><B>Q.</B> My glossaries haven't appeared.
<P>
<B>A.</B> Remember to do the following:
<UL>
<LI>Add <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5331"></A> to the document preamble.
<P>
</LI>
<LI>Use either <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="5334"></A> for each glossary that has
been defined or <TT>\printglossaries</TT><A NAME="5337"></A>.
<P>
</LI>
<LI>Use the commands listed in
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glslink">Links to Glossary
Entries</A>,
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsadd">Adding an Entry to the
Glossary Without Generating Text</A> or
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:crossref">Cross-Referencing
Entries</A> for each entry
that you want to appear in the glossary.
<P>
</LI>
<LI>Run LaTeX on your document, then run <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5340"></A>,
then run LaTeX on your document again. If you want the glossaries
to appear in the table of contents, you will need an extra LaTeX run. If any of your entries cross-reference an entry that's not
referenced in the main body of the document, you will need to
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeglossaries">run <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5346"></A></A>
after the second LaTeX run, followed by another LaTeX run.
</LI>
</UL>
<P>
Check the log files (<TT>.log</TT><A NAME="5349"></A>, <TT>.glg</TT><A NAME="5351"></A> etc) for any
warnings.
<P>
</LI>
<LI><B>Q.</B> It is possible to change the rules used to sort
the glossary entries?
<P>
<B>A.</B> If it's for an individual entry, then you can
use the entry's <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="5353"></A> key to sort it according to a
different term. If it's for the entire alphabet, then you will need
to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5356"></A> (instead of <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5359"></A>) and use an
appropriate <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5362"></A> language module. Writing <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5365"></A>
modules or styles is beyond the scope of this manual. Further
information about <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5368"></A> can be found at the
<A NAME="tex2html18"
HREF="http://xindy.sourceforge.net/">Xindy Web Site</A>.
There is also a link to the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5371"></A> mailing list from that
site.
<P>
</LI>
</OL>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H1><A NAME="SECTION00030000000000000000"></A><A NAME="sec:overview"></A>
<BR>
Overview of Main User Commands
</H1>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION00031000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:pkgopts"></A>
<BR>
Package Options
</H2>
<P>
The <TT>glossaries</TT> package options are as follows:
<DL>
<DT><STRONG><TT>nowarn</TT><A NAME="5383"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This suppresses all warnings generated by
the <TT>glossaries</TT> package.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>nomain</TT><A NAME="5393"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This suppresses the creation of the main
glossary. Note that if you use this option, you must create another
glossary in which to put all your entries (either via the
<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5402"></A> package option described below or via
<TT>\newglossary</TT><A NAME="5406"></A> described in
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:newglossary">Defining New
Glossaries</A>).
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>toc</TT><A NAME="5414"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>Add the glossaries to the table of contents.
Note that an extra LaTeX run is required with this option.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>numberline</TT><A NAME="5423"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>When used with <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="5432"></A>, this will
add <TT>\numberline</TT><code>{}</code> in the final argument of
<TT>\addcontentsline</TT>. This will align the table of contents entry
with the numbered section titles. Note that this option has no
effect if the <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="5441"></A> option is omitted. If <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="5450"></A> is
used without <TT>numberline</TT><A NAME="5459"></A>, the title will be aligned with
the section numbers rather than the section titles.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5468"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This creates a new glossary with the
label <TT>acronym</TT>. This is equivalent to:
<PRE>
\newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname}
</PRE>
If the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5477"></A> package option is used, <TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="5481"></A>
is set to <TT>acronym</TT> otherwise it is set to
<TT>main</TT>.<A NAME="tex2html19"
HREF="#foot4258"><SUP>3</SUP></A>
Entries that are defined using <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="5502"></A> are placed in
the glossary whose label is given by <TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="5505"></A>, unless
another glossary is explicitly specified.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>acronymlists</TT><A NAME="5513"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>By default, only the <TT>acronym</TT>
glossary is considered to be a list of acronyms. If you have other
lists of acronyms, you can specify them as a comma-separated list
in the value of <TT>acronymlists</TT><A NAME="5522"></A>. For example, if you want
the <TT>main</TT> glossary to also contain a list of acronyms, you
can do:
<PRE>
\usepackage[acronym,acronymlists={main}]{glossaries}
</PRE>
No check is performed to determine if the listed glossaries exist,
so you can add glossaries you haven't defined yet. For example:
<PRE>
\usepackage[acronym,acronymlists={main,acronym2}]{glossaries}
\newglossary[alg2]{acronym2}{acr2}{acn2}{Statistical Acronyms}
</PRE>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>section</TT><A NAME="5531"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> option. Its
value should be the name of a sectional unit (e.g. chapter).
This will make the glossaries appear in the named sectional unit,
otherwise each glossary will appear in a chapter, if chapters
exist, otherwise in a section. Unnumbered sectional units will be used
by default. Example:
<PRE>
\usepackage[section=subsection]{glossaries}
</PRE>
You can omit the value if you want to use sections, i.e. <PRE>
\usepackage[section]{glossaries}
</PRE>
is equivalent to
<PRE>
\usepackage[section=section]{glossaries}
</PRE>
You can change this value later in the document using
<P>
<TT>\setglossarysection{</TT><EM>name</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
where <I>name</I> is the sectional unit.
<P>
The start of each glossary adds information to the page header via
<P>
<TT>\glossarymark{</TT><EM>glossary title</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
This defaults to <TT>\@mkboth</TT>, but you may need to redefine it.
For example, to only change the right header:
<PRE>
\renewcommand{\glossarymark}[1]{\markright{#1}}
</PRE>
or to prevent it from changing the headers:
<PRE>
\renewcommand{\glossarymark}[1]{}
</PRE>
<P>
Occasionally you may find that another package defines
<TT>\cleardoublepage</TT> when it is not required. This may cause an
unwanted blank page to appear before each glossary. This can
be fixed by redefining <TT>\glsclearpage</TT><A NAME="5535"></A>:
<PRE>
\renewcommand*{\glsclearpage}{\clearpage}
</PRE>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="5543"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>The glossaries are placed in unnumbered sectional units by default,
but this can be changed using <TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="5552"></A>. This option can take
three possible values: <TT>false</TT><A NAME="5556"></A> (no
number, i.e. use starred form), <TT>nolabel</TT><A NAME="5558"></A>
(numbered, i.e. unstarred form, but not labelled) and
<TT>autolabel</TT><A NAME="5560"></A> (numbered with automatic
labelling). If <TT>numberedsection=autolabel</TT><A NAME="5569"></A> is used, each
glossary is given a label that matches the glossary type, so the
main (default) glossary is labelled <TT>main</TT>, the list of
acronyms is labelled <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="tex2html20"
HREF="#foot4259"><SUP>4</SUP></A> and additional glossaries are labelled
using the value specified in the first mandatory argument to
<TT>\newglossary</TT>. For example, if you load <TT>glossaries</TT>
using:
<PRE>
\usepackage[section,numberedsection=autolabel]{glossaries}
</PRE>
then each glossary will appear in a numbered section, and can
be referenced using something like:
<PRE>
The main glossary is in section~\ref{main} and the list of
acronyms is in section~\ref{acronym}.
</PRE>
If you can't decide whether to have the acronyms in the main
glossary or a separate list of acronyms, you can use
<TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="5581"></A> which is set to <TT>main</TT> if the
<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5589"></A> option is not used and is set to <TT>acronym</TT>
if the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5598"></A> option is used. For example:
<PRE>
The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{\acronymtype}.
</PRE>
<P>
As from version 1.14, you can add a prefix to the label by
redefining
<P>
<TT>\glsautoprefix</TT>
<P>
For example:
<PRE>
\renewcommand*{\glsautoprefix}{glo:}
</PRE>
will add <TT>glo:</TT> to the automatically generated label, so
you can then, for example, refer to the list of acronyms as follows:
<PRE>
The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{glo:\acronymtype}.
</PRE>
Or, if you are undecided on a prefix:
<PRE>
The list of acronyms is in section~\ref{\glsautoprefix\acronymtype}.
</PRE>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>style</TT><A NAME="5607"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> option. Its
value should be the name of the glossary style to use. Predefined
glossary styles are listed <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:styles">later</A>.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>nolong</TT><A NAME="5616"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This prevents the <TT>glossaries</TT> package
from automatically loading <TT>glossary-long</TT><A NAME="5621"></A> (which means that
the <TT>longtable</TT><A NAME="5624"></A> package also won't be loaded). This reduces
overhead by not defining unwanted styles and commands. Not that if
you use this option, you won't be able to use any of the
glossary styles defined in the <TT>glossary-long</TT> package.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>nosuper</TT><A NAME="5633"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This prevents the <TT>glossaries</TT> package
from automatically loading <TT>glossary-super</TT><A NAME="5638"></A> (which means that
the <TT>supertabular</TT><A NAME="5641"></A> package also won't be loaded). This reduces
overhead by not defining unwanted styles and commands. Not that if
you use this option, you won't be able to use any of the
glossary styles defined in the <TT>glossary-super</TT> package.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>nolist</TT><A NAME="5650"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This prevents the <TT>glossaries</TT> package
from automatically loading <TT>glossary-list</TT><A NAME="5655"></A>. This reduces
overhead by not defining unwanted styles. Not that if
you use this option, you won't be able to use any of the
glossary styles defined in the <TT>glossary-list</TT> package.
Note that since the default style is <TT>list</TT><A NAME="5659"></A>, you will
also need to use the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="5666"></A> option to set the style to
something else.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>notree</TT><A NAME="5675"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This prevents the <TT>glossaries</TT> package
from automatically loading <TT>glossary-tree</TT><A NAME="5680"></A>. This reduces
overhead by not defining unwanted styles. Not that if
you use this option, you won't be able to use any of the
glossary styles defined in the <TT>glossary-tree</TT> package.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="5689"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This prevents all the predefined styles
from being loaded. This option is provided in the event that the
user has custom styles that are not dependent on the styles
provided by the <TT>glossaries</TT> package. Note that if you use
this option, you can't use the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="5699"></A> package option. Instead
you must either use <TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="5703"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>style</EM><TT>}</TT> or
the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="5706"></A> key in the
optional argument to <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="5709"></A>.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="5717"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This option will suppress the
associated number lists<A NAME="5720"></A> in the glossaries (see also
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A>).
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>counter</TT><A NAME="5727"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> option. The
value should be the name of the default counter to use in the number
lists<A NAME="5730"></A>.
<P>
<A NAME="sanitize"></A>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="5737"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> option whose
value is also a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> list. By default, the
<TT>glossaries</TT> package sanitizes the values of the
<TT>name</TT><A NAME="5742"></A>, <TT>description</TT><A NAME="5745"></A> and <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5748"></A> keys used
when defining a new glossary entry. This means that you can use
fragile commands in those keys, but it may lead to unexpected results
if you try to display these values within the document text. This
sanitization can be switched off using the <TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="5756"></A> package
option. For example, to switch off the sanitization for the
<TT>description</TT><A NAME="5760"></A> and <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5763"></A> keys, but not for the
<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5766"></A> key, do:
<PRE>
\usepackage[sanitize={name=false,description=false,%
symbol=true}]{glossaries}
</PRE>
You can use <TT>sanitize=none</TT><A NAME="5776"></A> as a shortcut for
<BR>
<TT>sanitize={name=false,description=false,symbol=false}</TT>.
<P>
<B>Note</B>: this sanitization only applies to the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5779"></A>,
<TT>description</TT><A NAME="5782"></A> and <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="5785"></A> keys. It doesn't apply
to any of the other keys (except the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="5788"></A> key which is
always sanitized) so fragile commands contained in the value of
the other keys must always be protected using <TT>\protect</TT>.
Since the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5791"></A> key is obtained from the
<TT>name</TT><A NAME="5794"></A> key, you will still need to protect fragile commands
in the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="5797"></A> key if you don't use the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="5800"></A> key.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="5808"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This option changes the definition of
<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="5812"></A> to allow a description. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A>
for further details.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="5820"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This option changes the definition of
<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="5824"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A>
for further details.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="5832"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This option changes the definition of
<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="5836"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A>
for further details.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="5844"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This option changes the definition of
<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="5848"></A> and the way that acronyms are displayed.
If you use this option, you will need to include the <TT>relsize</TT><A NAME="5851"></A>
package or otherwise define <TT>\textsmaller</TT><A NAME="5854"></A> or redefine
<TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="5857"></A>. See
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A>
for further details.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>dua</TT><A NAME="5865"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This option changes the definition of
<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="5869"></A> so that acronyms are always expanded.
See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A>
for further details.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="5877"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This option provides shortcut commands
for acronyms.
See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A>
for further details.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5886"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>(Default) The glossary information and
indexing style file will be written in <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5890"></A> format. If you use
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5893"></A>, it will automatically detect that it needs
to call <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5896"></A>. If you don't use
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5899"></A>, you need to remember to use
<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5902"></A> not <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5905"></A>. The indexing style file
will been given a <TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="5908"></A> extension.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5915"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>The glossary information and indexing style file will
be written in <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5919"></A> format. If you use
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5922"></A>, it will automatically detect that it needs
to call <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5925"></A>. If you don't use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5928"></A>,
you need to remember to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5931"></A> not <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="5934"></A>.
The indexing style file will been given a <TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="5937"></A> extension.
<P>
The <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5944"></A> package option may additionally have a
value that is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> comma-separated list to override
the language and codepage. For example:
<PRE>
\usepackage[xindy={language=english,codepage=utf8}]{glossaries}
</PRE>
You can also specify whether you want a number group in
the glossary. This defaults to true, but can be suppressed. For
example:
<PRE>
\usepackage[xindy={glsnumbers=false}]{glossaries}
</PRE>
See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:xindy">Xindy</A>
for further details on using <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="5948"></A> with the
<TT>glossaries</TT> package.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>order</TT><A NAME="5957"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This may take two values:
<TT>word</TT><A NAME="5961"></A> or <TT>letter</TT><A NAME="5963"></A>. The default
is word ordering. Note that this option has no effect if you
don't use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="5965"></A>.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>translate</TT><A NAME="5973"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This is a boolean option. The default is
<TT>true</TT><A NAME="5977"></A> if <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="5979"></A>, <TT>polyglossia</TT><A NAME="5982"></A> or
<TT>translator</TT><A NAME="5985"></A> have been loaded, otherwise the default value is
<TT>false</TT><A NAME="5988"></A>.
<P>
<DL>
<DT><STRONG><TT>translate=true</TT><A NAME="5997"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>If <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="5999"></A> has been loaded
and the <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="6002"></A> package is installed, <TT>translator</TT><A NAME="6005"></A>
will be loaded and the translations will be provided by the
<TT>translator</TT><A NAME="6008"></A> package interface. You can modify the
translations by providing your own dictionary. If the
<TT>translator</TT><A NAME="6011"></A> package isn't installed and <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="6014"></A> is
loaded, the <TT>glossaries-babel</TT><A NAME="6017"></A> package will
be loaded and the translations will be provided using <TT>babel</TT>'s
<TT>\addto\caption</TT><I>language</I> mechanism. If
<TT>polyglossia</TT><A NAME="6021"></A> has been loaded, <TT>glossaries-polyglossia</TT><A NAME="6024"></A>
will be loaded.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>translate=false</TT><A NAME="6034"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>Don't provide translations, even
if <TT>babel</TT><A NAME="6036"></A> or <TT>polyglossia</TT><A NAME="6039"></A> has been loaded. You can
then provide you're own translations or explicitly load
<TT>glossaries-babel</TT><A NAME="6042"></A> or <TT>glossaries-polyglossia</TT><A NAME="6045"></A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>hyperfirst</TT><A NAME="6053"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This is a boolean option that specifies
whether each term has a hyperlink on first use<A NAME="6056"></A>. The default is
<TT>hyperfirst=true</TT><A NAME="6065"></A> (terms on first use have a hyperlink,
unless explicitly suppressed using starred versions of commands
such as <TT>\gls*</TT>).
<P>
</DD>
</DL>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION00032000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:newglosentry"></A>
<BR>
Defining Glossary Entries
</H2>
<P>
All glossary entries must be defined before they are used, so it
is better to define them in the preamble to ensure this.<A NAME="tex2html21"
HREF="#foot4283"><SUP>5</SUP></A> However
only those entries that occur in the document
(using any of the commands described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glslink">Links to Glossary Entries</A>,
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsadd">Adding an entry to the glossary without generating text</A> or
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:crossref">Cross-Referencing
Entries</A>) will appear in the glossary. Each time an entry
is used in this way, a line is added to an associated glossary file
(<TT>.glo</TT><A NAME="6070"></A>), which then needs to be converted into a
corresponding <TT>.gls</TT><A NAME="6072"></A> file which contains the typeset
glossary which is input by <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="6074"></A> or
<TT>\printglossaries</TT><A NAME="6077"></A>. The Perl script <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6080"></A> can
be used to call <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6083"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6086"></A>, using a
customised indexing style file, for each of the glossaries that are
defined in the document. Note that there should be no need for you
to explicitly edit or input any of these external files. See
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeglossaries">Generating the
Associated Glossary Files</A>
for further details.
<P>
The command <TT>\makeglossaries</TT> must be placed in the preamble in
order to create the customised <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6089"></A> (<TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="6092"></A>)
or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6094"></A> (<TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="6097"></A>)
style file and to ensure that glossary entries are written to the
appropriate output files. If you omit <TT>\makeglossaries</TT> none of the
glossaries will be created.
<P>
Note that some of the commands provided by the <TT>glossaries</TT>
package must be placed before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT> as they are
required when creating the customised style file. If you attempt
to use those commands after <TT>\makeglossaries</TT> you will generate
an error.
<P>
You can suppress the creation of the customised <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6100"></A>
or <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6103"></A> style file using <TT>\noist</TT>. Note that this
command must be used before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT>.
<P>
The default name for the customised style file is given by
<TT>\jobname</TT><A NAME="6106"></A><TT>.ist</TT><A NAME="6109"></A> (for <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6111"></A>) or
<TT>\jobname</TT><A NAME="6114"></A><TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="6117"></A> (for <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6119"></A>). This name may be
changed using:
<P>
<TT>\setStyleFile{</TT><EM>name</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
where <I>name</I> is the name of the style file without the
extension. Note that this command must be used before
<TT>\makeglossaries</TT>.
<P>
Each glossary entry is assigned a number list<A NAME="6121"></A> that lists all
the locations in the document where that entry was used. By default,
the location refers to the page number but this may be overridden
using the <TT>counter</TT><A NAME="6128"></A> package option. The default form of
the location number assumes a full stop compositor (e.g. 1.2),
but if your location numbers use a different compositor (e.g. 1-2)
you need to set this using
<P>
<TT>\glsSetCompositor{</TT><EM>symbol</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
For example:
<PRE>
\glsSetCompositor{-}
</PRE>
Note that this command must be used before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT>.
<P>
If you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6132"></A>, you can have a different compositor
for page numbers starting with an uppercase alphabetical
character using:
<P>
<TT>\glsSetAlphaCompositor{</TT><EM>symbol</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
Note that this command has no effect if you haven't used the
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6140"></A> package option. For example, if you want
number lists<A NAME="6143"></A> containing a mixture of A-1 and 2.3
style formats, then do:
<PRE>
\glsSetCompositor{.}
\glsSetAlphaCompositor{-}
</PRE>
See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number
lists</A> for
further information about number lists<A NAME="6144"></A>.
<P>
New glossary entries are defined using the command:
<P>
<TT>\newglossaryentry{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>key-val list</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
The first
argument, <I>label</I>, must be a unique label with which to identify
this entry. The second argument, <I>key-val list</I>, is a
<I>key</I>=<I>value</I> list that supplies the relevant information
about this entry. There are two required fields: <TT>name</TT><A NAME="6146"></A> and
<TT>description</TT><A NAME="6149"></A>, except for sub-entries where the
<TT>name</TT><A NAME="6152"></A> field may be omitted. Available fields are listed
below:
<P>
<DL>
<DT><STRONG><TT>name</TT><A NAME="6155"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>The name of the entry (as it will appear in
the glossary). If this key is omitted and the <TT>parent</TT><A NAME="6158"></A>
key is supplied, this value will be the same as the parent's name.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="6161"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>A brief description of this term (to
appear in the glossary). Within this value, you can use
<TT>\nopostdesc</TT> to suppress the
description terminator for this entry. For example, if this
entry is a parent entry that doesn't require a description, you
can do <code>description={\nopostdesc}</code>. If you want a paragraph
break in the description use <TT>\glspar</TT>.
However, note that not all glossary styles support multi-line
descriptions. If you are using one of the tabular-like glossary
styles that permit multi-line descriptions, use <TT>\newline</TT><A NAME="6164"></A>
not <code>\\</code> if you want to force a line break.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>parent</TT><A NAME="6167"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>The label of the parent entry. Note that
the parent entry must be defined before its sub-entries.
See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:subentries">Sub-Entries</A> for
further details.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>descriptionplural</TT><A NAME="6170"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>The plural form of the
description (as passed to <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="6173"></A> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="6176"></A>
by <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="6179"></A>, <TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="6182"></A> and <TT>\GLSpl</TT><A NAME="6185"></A>). If omitted, the value
is set to the same as the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6188"></A> key.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>text</TT><A NAME="6191"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>How this entry will appear in the document text
when using <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="6194"></A> (or one of its uppercase variants). If this
field is omitted, the value of the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="6197"></A> key is used.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>first</TT><A NAME="6200"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>How the entry will appear in the document text
the first time it is used with <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="6203"></A><A NAME="6205"></A> (or one of its uppercase
variants). If this field is omitted, the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="6207"></A>
key is used.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>plural</TT><A NAME="6210"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>How the entry will appear in the document text
when using <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="6213"></A> (or one of its uppercase variants).
If this field is omitted, the value is obtained by appending
<TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT><A NAME="6216"></A> to the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="6219"></A> field.
The default value of <TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT> is the letter
"s".
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="6222"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>How the entry will appear in the
document text the first time it is used with <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="6225"></A><A NAME="6227"></A> (or one of its
uppercase variants). If this field is omitted, the value is obtained
from the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="6229"></A> key, if the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="6232"></A> key is omitted,
or by appending <TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT><A NAME="6235"></A> to the value of the
<TT>first</TT><A NAME="6238"></A> field, if the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="6241"></A> field is present.
<P>
<B>Note:</B> prior to version 1.13, the default value of
<TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="6244"></A> was always taken by appending "s" to the
<TT>first</TT><A NAME="6247"></A> key, which meant that you had to specify both
<TT>plural</TT><A NAME="6250"></A> and <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="6253"></A>, even if you hadn't
used the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="6256"></A> key.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6259"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This field is provided to allow the user to
specify an associated symbol. If omitted, the value is set to
<TT>\relax</TT>. Note that not all glossary styles display the
symbol.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>symbolplural</TT><A NAME="6262"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This is the plural form of the
symbol (as passed to <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="6265"></A> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="6268"></A>
by <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="6271"></A>, <TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="6274"></A> and <TT>\GLSpl</TT><A NAME="6277"></A>). If omitted, the value
is set to the same as the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6280"></A> key.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>sort</TT><A NAME="6283"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This value indicates how <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6286"></A>
or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6289"></A> should sort this entry. If omitted, the value is
given by the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="6292"></A> field.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>type</TT><A NAME="6295"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This specifies the label of the glossary in
which this entry belongs. If omitted, the default glossary is
assumed. The list of acronyms type is given by
<TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="6298"></A> which will either be <TT>main</TT> or
<TT>acronym</TT>, depending on whether the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="6306"></A> package
option was used.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>user1</TT><A NAME="6310"></A>, ..., <TT>user6</TT><A NAME="6313"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>Six additional
keys provided for any additional information the user may want
to specify. (For example, an associated dimension or an alternative
plural.)
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="6316"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>Suppress the number list<A NAME="6318"></A> for
this entry.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>see</TT><A NAME="6320"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>Cross-reference another entry. Using the
<TT>see</TT><A NAME="6323"></A> key will automatically add this entry to the
glossary, but will not automatically add the cross-referenced entry.
The referenced entry should be supplied as the value to this key.
If you want to override the "see" tag, you can supply the new
tag in square brackets before the label. For example
<code>see=[see also]{anotherlabel}</code>. For further details,
see <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:crossref">later</A>.
<P>
</DD>
</DL>
Note that if the name starts with an accented letter or non-Latin
character, you must group the accented letter, otherwise it will
cause a problem for commands like <TT>\Gls</TT> and <TT>\Glspl</TT>.
For example:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{\'e}lite},
description={select group or class}}
</PRE>
Note that the same applies if you are using the <TT>inputenc</TT><A NAME="6326"></A>
package:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{é}lite},
description={select group or class}}
</PRE>
Note that in both of the above examples, you will also need to
supply the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="6329"></A> key if you are using <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6332"></A>
whereas <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6335"></A> is usually able to sort accented letters
correctly.
<P>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION00032100000000000000">
Plurals</A>
</H3>
You may have noticed from above that you can specify the plural form
when you define a term. If you omit this, the plural will be
obtained by appending
<TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT> to
the singular form. This command defaults to the letter "s".
For example:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{cow}{name=cow,description={a fully grown
female of any bovine animal}}
</PRE>
defines a new entry whose singular form is "cow" and plural form
is "cows". However, if you are writing in archaic English, you
may want to use "kine" as the plural form, in which case you
would have to do:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{cow}{name=cow,plural=kine,
description={a fully grown female of any bovine animal}}
</PRE>
<P>
If you are writing in a language that supports
multiple plurals (for a given term) then use the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="6341"></A> key
for one of them and one of the user keys to specify the
other plural form. For example:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{cow}{name=cow,description={a fully grown
female of any bovine animal (plural cows, archaic plural kine)},
user1={kine}}
</PRE>
You can then use <code>\glspl{cow}</code> to produce "cows" and
<code>\glsuseri{cow}</code> to produce "kine". You can, of course,
define an easy to remember synonym. For example:
<PRE>
\let\glsaltpl\glsuseri
</PRE>
Then you don't have to remember which key you used to store the
alternative plural.
<P>
If you are using a language that usually forms plurals
by appending a different letter, or sequence of letters, you can
redefine <TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT> as required. However, this must be
done <I>before</I> the entries are defined. For languages that don't
form plurals by simply appending a suffix, all the plural forms must be
specified using the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="6344"></A> key (and the <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="6347"></A>
key where necessary).
<P>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION00032200000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:subentries"></A>
<BR>
Sub-Entries
</H3>
<P>
As from version 1.17, it is possible to specify sub-entries. These
may be used to order the glossary into categories, in which case
the sub-entry will have a different name to its parent entry, or
it may be used to distinguish different definitions for the same
word, in which case the sub-entries will have the same name as
the parent entry. Note that not all glossary styles support
hierarchical entries and may display all the entries in a flat
format. Of the styles that support sub-entries, some display the
sub-entry's name whilst others don't. Therefore you need to
ensure that you use a suitable style. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:styles">later</A>
for a list of predefined
styles.
<P>
Note that the parent entry will automatically be added to the
glossary if any of its child entries are used in the document.
If the parent entry is not referenced in the document, it will not
have a number list<A NAME="6352"></A>.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H4><A NAME="SECTION00032210000000000000">
Hierarchical Categories</A>
</H4> To arrange a glossary
with hierarchical categories, you need to first define the
category and then define the sub-entries using the relevant
category entry as the value of the <TT>parent</TT><A NAME="6357"></A> key. For
example, suppose I want a glossary of mathematical symbols that
are divided into Greek letters and Roman letters. Then I can
define the categories as follows:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{greekletter}{name={Greek letters},
description={\nopostdesc}}
\newglossaryentry{romanletter}{name={Roman letters},
description={\nopostdesc}}
</PRE>
<P>
Note that in this example, the category entries don't need a
description so I have set the descriptions to <TT>\nopostdesc</TT><A NAME="6360"></A>.
This gives a blank description and suppresses the
description terminator.
<P>
I can now define my sub-entries as follows:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{pi}{name={pi},
description={ratio of the circumference of a circle to the diameter},
parent=greekletter}
\newglossaryentry{C}{name=C,
description={Euler's constant},
parent=romanletter}
</PRE>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H4><A NAME="SECTION00032220000000000000">
Homographs</A>
</H4> Sub-entries that have the same name as
the parent entry, don't need to have the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="6366"></A> key.
For example, the word "glossary" can mean a list of technical
words or a collection of glosses. In both cases the plural is
"glossaries". So first define the parent entry:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{glossary}{name=glossary,
description={\nopostdesc},
plural={glossaries}}
</PRE>
Again, the parent entry has no description, so the description
terminator needs to be suppressed using <TT>\nopostdesc</TT><A NAME="6369"></A>.
<P>
Now define the two different meanings of the word:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{glossarylist}{
description={1) list of technical words},
sort={1},
parent={glossary}}
\newglossaryentry{glossarycol}{
description={2) collection of glosses},
sort={2},
parent={glossary}}
</PRE>
Note that if I reference the parent entry, the location will be
added to the parent's number list<A NAME="6371"></A>, whereas if I reference
any of the child entries, the location will be added to the child
entry's number list. Note also that since the sub-entries have the
same name, the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="6373"></A> key is required.
<P>
In the above example, the plural form for both of the child entries
is the same as the parent entry, so the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="6376"></A> key was
not required for the child entries. However, if the sub-entries
have different plurals, they will need to be specified. For example:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{bravo}{name={bravo},
description={\nopostdesc}}
\newglossaryentry{bravocry}{description={1) cry of approval (pl.\ bravos)},
sort={1},
plural={bravos},
parent=bravo}
\newglossaryentry{bravoruffian}{description={2) hired ruffian or
killer (pl.\ bravoes)},
sort={2},
plural={bravoes},
parent=bravo}
</PRE>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION00032300000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:loadglsentries"></A>
<BR>
Loading Entries From a File
</H3>
<P>
You can store all your glossary entry definitions in another
file and use:
<P>
<TT>\loadglsentries[</TT><EM>type</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>filename</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
where <I>filename</I> is the name of the file containing all the
<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> commands. The optional argument
<I>type</I> is the name of the glossary to which those entries
should belong, for those entries where the <TT>type</TT><A NAME="6382"></A> key has
been omitted (or, more specifically, for those entries whose
type has been specified by <TT>\glsdefaulttype</TT>, which is what
<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> uses by default). For example, suppose I have
a file called <TT>myentries.tex</TT> which contains:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{perl}{type=main,
name={Perl},
description={A scripting language}}
\newglossaryentry{tex}{name={\TeX},
description={A typesetting language},sort={TeX}}
\newglossaryentry{html}{type=\glsdefaulttype,
name={html},
description={A mark up language}}
</PRE>
and suppose in my document preamble I use the command:
<PRE>
\loadglsentries[languages]{myentries}
</PRE>
then this will add the entries <TT>tex</TT> and <TT>html</TT>
to the glossary whose type is given by <TT>languages</TT>, but
the entry <TT>perl</TT> will be added to the main glossary, since
it explicitly sets the type to <TT>main</TT>.
<P>
<B>Note:</B> if you
use <TT>\newacronym</TT> (see <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:acronyms">later</A>)
the type is set as <code>type=\acronymtype</code>
unless you explicitly override it. For example, if my file
<TT>myacronyms.tex</TT> contains:
<PRE>
\newacronym{aca}{aca}{a contrived acronym}
</PRE>
then (supposing I have defined a new glossary type called
<TT>altacronym</TT>)
<PRE>
\loadglsentries[altacronym]{myacronyms}
</PRE>
will add <TT>aca</TT> to the glossary type <TT>acronym</TT>, if the
package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="6390"></A> has been specified, or will add
<TT>aca</TT> to the glossary type <TT>altacronym</TT>, if the
package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="6399"></A> is not specified.<A NAME="tex2html22"
HREF="#foot4317"><SUP>6</SUP></A> In this instance,
it is better to change <TT>myacronyms.tex</TT> to:
<PRE>
\newacronym[type=\glsdefaulttype]{aca}{aca}{a contrived acronym}
</PRE>
and now
<PRE>
\loadglsentries[altacronym]{myacronyms}
</PRE>
will add <TT>aca</TT> to the glossary type <TT>altacronym</TT>,
regardless of whether or not the package option <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="6417"></A> is
used.
<P>
Note that only those entries that have been used
in the text will appear in the relevant glossaries.
Note also that <TT>\loadglsentries</TT> may only be used in the
preamble.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION00033000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:numberlists"></A>
<BR>
Number lists
</H2>
<P>
Each entry in the glossary has an associated <I>number list</I><A NAME="6424"></A>.
By default,
these numbers refer to the pages on which that entry has been used
(using any of the commands described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glslink">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
and <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsadd">Adding an entry to the glossary without generating text</A>). The number list can be suppressed using
the <TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="6431"></A> package option, or an alternative counter
can be set as the default using the <TT>counter</TT><A NAME="6440"></A> package option.
The number list is also referred to as the location
list<A NAME="4322"></A>.
<P>
Both <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6444"></A> and <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6447"></A> concatenate a
sequence of 3 or more consecutive pages into a range. With
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6450"></A> you can vary the minimum sequence length using
<TT>\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength</TT><A NAME="6453"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>n</EM><TT>}</TT> where <I>n</I> is either
an integer or the keyword <TT>none</TT> which indicates that there
should be no range formation.
<P>
Note that <TT>\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength</TT> must be used before
<TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6456"></A> and has no effect if <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="6459"></A> is used.
<P>
With both <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6462"></A> and <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6465"></A>, you can replace
the separator and the closing number in the range using:
<P>
<TT>\glsSetSuffixF{</TT><EM>suffix</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glsSetSuffixFF{</TT><EM>suffix</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
where the former command specifies the suffix to use for a 2 page
list and the latter specifies the suffix to use for longer lists.
For example:
<PRE>
\glsSetSuffixF{f.}
\glsSetSuffixFF{ff.}
</PRE>
Note that if you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6468"></A>, you will also need to
set the minimum range length to 1 if you want to change these
suffixes:
<PRE>
\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength{1}
</PRE>
Note that if you use the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="6471"></A> package, you will need
to use <TT>\nohyperpage</TT><A NAME="6474"></A> in the suffix to ensure that the hyperlinks
work correctly. For example:
<PRE>
\glsSetSuffixF{\nohyperpage{f.}}
\glsSetSuffixFF{\nohyperpage{ff.}}
</PRE>
<P>
Note that <TT>\glsSetSuffixF</TT> and <TT>\glsSetSuffixFF</TT> must be used
before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6477"></A> and have no effect if <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="6480"></A> is
used.
<P>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION00034000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:glslink"></A>
<BR>
Links to Glossary Entries
</H2>
<P>
Once you have defined a glossary entry using
<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="6486"></A>, you can refer to that entry in the
document using one of the commands listed in this section. The
text which appears at that point in the document when using
one of these commands is referred to as the
<I>link text</I><A NAME="6489"></A> (even if there are no hyperlinks). The commands
in this section also add a line to an external file that is used
by <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6491"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6494"></A> to generate the relevant
entry in the glossary. This information includes an
associated location that is added to the number list<A NAME="6496"></A> for that
entry. By default, the location refers to the page number. For
further information on number lists, see <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A>.
<P>
It is strongly recommended that you don't use the commands
defined in this section in the arguments of sectioning or caption
commands.
<P>
The above warning is particularly important if you are using the
<TT>glossaries</TT> package in conjunction with the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="6499"></A> package.
Instead, use one of the commands listed in
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsnolink">Using Glossary Terms
Without Links</A> (such as <TT>\glsentrytext</TT>) or provide an alternative via
the optional argument to the sectioning/caption command.
Examples:
<PRE>
\section{An overview of \glsentrytext{perl}}
\section[An overview of Perl]{An overview of \gls{perl}}
</PRE>
<P>
The way the link text<A NAME="6501"></A> is displayed
depends on
<P>
<TT>\glstextformat{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
For example, to make all link text<A NAME="6502"></A> appear in a sans-serif
font, do:
<PRE>
\renewcommand*{\glstextformat}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
</PRE>
<P>
Each entry has an associated conditional referred to as the
first use flag<A NAME="6503"></A>. This determines whether <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="6505"></A>,
<TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="6508"></A> (and their uppercase variants) should use the
value of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="6511"></A> or <TT>text</TT><A NAME="6514"></A> keys. Note that an
entry can be used without affecting the first use flag<A NAME="6516"></A> (for example,
when used with <TT>\glslink</TT>). See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsunset">later</A> for
commands that unset or reset this conditional.
<P>
The command:
<P>
<TT>\glslink[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
will place <TT>\glstextformat{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT> in the document at that
point and add a line into the associated glossary file for the
glossary entry given by <I>label</I>. If hyperlinks are supported,
<I>text</I> will be a hyperlink to the relevant line in the
glossary. (Note that this command doesn't affect the first use flag<A NAME="6517"></A>:
use <TT>\glsdisp</TT><A NAME="6519"></A> instead.) The optional argument <I>options</I>
must be a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> list which can take any of the
following keys:
<P>
<DL>
<DT><STRONG><TT>format</TT><A NAME="6522"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This specifies how to format the
associated location number for this entry in the glossary. This
value is equivalent to the <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6525"></A> encap value, and (as
with <TT>\index</TT>) the value needs to be the name of a command
<I>without</I> the initial backslash. As with <TT>\index</TT>, the
characters <code>(</code> and <code>)</code> can also be used to specify the
beginning and ending of a number range. Again as with <TT>\index</TT>,
the command should be the name of a command which takes an argument
(which will be the associated location). Be careful not to use a
declaration (such as <TT>bfseries</TT>) instead of a text block command
(such as <TT>textbf</TT>) as the effect is not guaranteed to be
localised. If you want to apply more than one style to a given entry
(e.g. <B>bold</B> and <I>italic</I>) you will need to create a
command that applies both formats, e.g.
<PRE>
\newcommand*{\textbfem}[1]{\textbf{\emph{#1}}}
</PRE>
and use that command.
<P>
In this document, the standard formats refer to the standard text
block commands such as <TT>\textbf</TT><A NAME="6528"></A> or <TT>\emph</TT><A NAME="6531"></A> or any of the
commands listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:hyperxx">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:hyperxx">3</A>.
<P>
If you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6537"></A> instead of <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6540"></A>, you
must specify any non-standard formats that you want to use
with the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="6543"></A> key using
<TT>\GlsAddXdyAttribute</TT><A NAME="6546"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>name</EM><TT>}</TT>. So if you use
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6549"></A> with the above example, you would need to add:
<PRE>
\GlsAddXdyAttribute{textbfem}
</PRE>
<P>
Note that unlike <TT>\index</TT>, you can't have
anything following the command name, such as an asterisk or
arguments. If you want to cross-reference another entry, either
use the <TT>see</TT><A NAME="6552"></A> key when you define the entry or use
<TT>\glssee</TT><A NAME="6555"></A> (described <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:crossref">later</A>).
<P>
If you are using hyperlinks and you want to change the font of the
hyperlinked location, don't use <TT>\hyperpage</TT><A NAME="6558"></A> (provided by the
<TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="6561"></A> package) as the locations may not refer to a page
number. Instead, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package provides number
formats listed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:hyperxx">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:hyperxx">3</A>.
<P>
<BR><P></P>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
<A NAME="tab:hyperxx"></A>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER"><A NAME="1705"></A>
<TABLE CELLPADDING=3>
<CAPTION><STRONG>Table 3:</STRONG>
Predefined Hyperlinked Location Formats</CAPTION>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperrm</TT><A NAME="6568"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">serif hyperlink</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypersf</TT><A NAME="6571"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">sans-serif hyperlink</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypertt</TT><A NAME="6574"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">monospaced hyperlink</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperbf</TT><A NAME="6577"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">bold hyperlink</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypermd</TT><A NAME="6580"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">medium weight hyperlink</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperit</TT><A NAME="6583"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">italic hyperlink</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypersl</TT><A NAME="6586"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">slanted hyperlink</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperup</TT><A NAME="6589"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">upright hyperlink</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hypersc</TT><A NAME="6592"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">small caps hyperlink</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>hyperemph</TT><A NAME="6595"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">emphasized hyperlink</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</DIV>
<P>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER"></DIV>
</DIV>
<BR>
<P>
Note that if the <TT>\hyperlink</TT><A NAME="6598"></A> command hasn't been defined,
the <TT>hyper</TT><I>xx</I> formats are equivalent to the
analogous <TT>text</TT><I>xx</I> font commands (and <TT>hyperemph</TT>
is equivalent to <TT>emph</TT>). If you want to
make a new format, you will need to define a command which takes
one argument and use that; for example, if you want the location
number to be in a bold sans-serif font, you can define a
command called, say, <TT>\hyperbsf</TT>:
<PRE>
\newcommand{\hyperbsf}[1]{\textbf{\hypersf{#1}}}
</PRE>
and then use <TT>hyperbsf</TT> as the value for the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="6601"></A>
key.
Remember that if you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6604"></A>, you will need to add
this to the list of location attributes:
<PRE>
\GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperbsf}
</PRE>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>counter</TT><A NAME="6607"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This specifies which counter
to use for this location. This overrides the default counter
used by this entry. (See also
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A>.)
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="6610"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This is a boolean key which can
be used to enable/disable the hyperlink to the relevant entry
in the glossary. (Note that setting <TT>hyper=true</TT> will have no
effect if <TT>\hyperlink</TT> has not been defined.) The default
value is <TT>hyper=true</TT>.
<P>
</DD>
</DL>
There is also a starred version:
<P>
<TT>\glslink*[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
which is equivalent to <TT>\glslink</TT>, except it sets
<TT>hyper=false</TT>. Similarly, all the following commands
described in this section also have a starred version that disables
the hyperlink.
<P>
The command:
<P>
<TT>\gls[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
is the same as <TT>\glslink</TT>, except that the link text<A NAME="6612"></A>
is determined from the values of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="6614"></A> and
<TT>first</TT><A NAME="6617"></A> keys supplied when the entry was defined using
<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="6620"></A>. If the entry has been marked as having
been used<A NAME="6622"></A>, the value of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="6624"></A> key will be used, otherwise
the value of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="6627"></A> key will be used.
On completion, <TT>\gls</TT> will mark the entry's first use flag<A NAME="6629"></A> as
used.
<P>
There are two uppercase variants:
<P>
<TT>\Gls[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
and
<P>
<TT>\GLS[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
which make the first letter of the link text or all the link text
uppercase, respectively.
<P>
The final optional argument <I>insert</I>, allows you to insert
some additional text into the link text. By default, this will
append <I>insert</I> at the end of the link text, but this
can be changed (see
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsdisplay">later</A>).
<P>
The first optional argument <I>options</I> is the same as the optional
argument to <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="6631"></A>. As with <TT>\glslink</TT>, these commands also
have a starred version that disable the hyperlink.
<P>
There are also analogous plural forms:
<P>
<TT>\glspl[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glspl[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\GLSpl[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
These determine the link text from the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="6634"></A> and
<TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="6637"></A> keys supplied when the entry was first
defined. As before, these commands also have
a starred version that disable the hyperlink.
<P>
Note that <TT>\glslink</TT> doesn't use or affect the first use flag<A NAME="6639"></A>,
nor does it use <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="6641"></A> or <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="6644"></A> (see
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsdisplay">later</A>).
Instead, you can use:
<P>
<TT>\glsdisp[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>link text</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
This behaves in the same way as <TT>\gls</TT>, except that it uses
<I>link text</I> instead of the value of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="6647"></A>
or <TT>text</TT><A NAME="6650"></A> key. (Note that this command always sets
<I>insert</I> to nothing.) This command affects the first use flag<A NAME="6652"></A>,
and uses <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="6654"></A> or <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="6657"></A>.
<P>
The command:
<P>
<TT>\glstext[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
is similar to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="6660"></A> except that it always uses the value
of the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="6663"></A> key and does not affect the
first use flag<A NAME="6665"></A>.
Unlike <TT>\gls</TT>, the inserted text <I>insert</I>
is always appended to the link text since <TT>\glstext</TT> doesn't
use <TT>\glsdisplay</TT><A NAME="6667"></A> or <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="6670"></A>. (The same is
true for all the following commands described in this section.)
<P>
There are also analogous commands:
<P>
<TT>\Glstext[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\GLStext[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable
the hyperlink.
<P>
The command:
<P>
<TT>\glsfirst[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="6673"></A> except that it always uses the value
of the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="6676"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended
to the end of the link text and does not affect the
first use flag<A NAME="6678"></A>.
<P>
There are also analogous commands:
<P>
<TT>\Glsfirst[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\GLSfirst[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable
the hyperlink.
<P>
The command:
<P>
<TT>\glsplural[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="6680"></A> except that it always uses the value
of the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="6683"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended
to the end of the link text and does not mark the entry as having
been used.
<P>
There are also analogous commands:
<P>
<TT>\Glsplural[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\GLSplural[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable
the hyperlink.
<P>
The command:
<P>
<TT>\glsfirstplural[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="6686"></A> except that it always uses the value
of the <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="6689"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always
appended to the end of the link text and does not mark the entry as
having been used.
<P>
There are also analogous commands:
<P>
<TT>\Glsfirstplural[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\GLSfirstplural[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable
the hyperlink.
<P>
The command:
<P>
<TT>\glsname[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="6692"></A> except that it always uses the value of the
<TT>name</TT><A NAME="6695"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the end
of the link text and does not mark the entry as having
been used. Note: if you want to use this command and the
<TT>name</TT><A NAME="6698"></A> key contains commands, you will have to disable the
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sanitize">sanitization</A>
of the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="6701"></A> key and protect fragile commands.
<P>
There are also analogous commands:
<P>
<TT>\Glsname[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\GLSname[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable
the hyperlink.
<P>
The command:
<P>
<TT>\glssymbol[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="6704"></A> except that it always uses the value of the
<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6707"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always appended to the
end of the link text and does not mark the entry as having
been used. Note: if you want to use this command and the
<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6710"></A> key contains commands, you will have to disable the
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sanitize">sanitization</A>
of the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6713"></A> key and protect fragile commands.
<P>
There are also analogous commands:
<P>
<TT>\Glssymbol[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\GLSsymbol[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable
the hyperlink.
<P>
The command:
<P>
<TT>\glsdesc[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="6716"></A> except that it always uses the value
of the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6719"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always
appended to the end of the link text and does not mark the entry as
having been used. Note: if you want to use this
command and the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6722"></A> key contains commands, you will
have to disable the
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sanitize">sanitization</A>
of the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6725"></A> key and protect fragile commands.
<P>
There are also analogous commands:
<P>
<TT>\Glsdesc[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\GLSdesc[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable
the hyperlink.
<P>
The command:
<P>
<TT>\glsuseri[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
is similar to <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="6728"></A> except that it always uses the value
of the <TT>user1</TT><A NAME="6731"></A> key. Again, <I>insert</I> is always
appended to the end of the link text and does not mark the entry as
having been used.
<P>
There are also analogous commands:
<P>
<TT>\Glsuseri[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\GLSuseri[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
As before, these commands also have a starred version that disable
the hyperlink. Similarly for the other user keys:
<P>
<TT>\glsuserii[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsuserii[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\GLSuserii[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glsuseriii[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsuseriii[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\GLSuseriii[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glsuseriv[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsuseriv[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\GLSuseriv[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glsuserv[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsuserv[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\GLSuserv[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glsuservi[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsuservi[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\GLSuservi[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION00034100000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:glsdisplay"></A>
<BR>
Changing the format of the link text
</H3>
<P>
The format of the link text<A NAME="6736"></A> for <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="6738"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="6741"></A>
and their uppercase variants is governed by two commands:
<P>
<TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT>
<P>
which is used the
first time a glossary entry is used<A NAME="6743"></A> in the text and
<P>
<TT>\glsdisplay</TT>
<P>
which is used subsequently.
Both commands take four arguments: the first is either the singular or
plural form given by the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="6745"></A>, <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="6748"></A>,
<TT>first</TT><A NAME="6751"></A> or <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="6754"></A> keys (set when the term was
defined) depending on context; the second argument is the term's
description (as supplied by the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="6757"></A> or
<TT>descriptionplural</TT><A NAME="6760"></A> keys); the third
argument is the symbol associated with the term (as supplied by the
<TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6763"></A> or <TT>symbolplural</TT><A NAME="6766"></A> keys) and the fourth argument is the additional text
supplied in the final optional argument to <TT>\gls</TT> or
<TT>\glspl</TT> (or their uppercase variants). The default definitions
of <TT>\glsdisplay</TT> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> simply
print the first argument immediately followed by the fourth argument.
The remaining arguments are ignored.
<P>
If required, you can access the label for the given entry via
<TT>\glslabel</TT><A NAME="6769"></A>, so it is possible to use
this label in the definition of <TT>\glsdisplay</TT> or
<TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> to supply additional information using any of
the commands described in
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsnolink">Using Glossary Terms
Without Links</A>, if required.
<P>
Note that <TT>\glsdisplay</TT> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> are not used
by <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="6772"></A>. If you want to supply your own link text, you
need to use <TT>\glsdisp</TT><A NAME="6775"></A> instead.
<P>
For example, suppose you want a glossary of measurements and
units, you can use the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6778"></A> key to store the unit:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{distance}{name=distance,
description={The length between two points},
symbol={km}}
</PRE>
and now suppose you want <code>\gls{distance}</code> to produce
"distance (km)" on first use<A NAME="6780"></A>, then you can redefine
<TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> as follows:
<PRE>
\renewcommand{\glsdisplayfirst}[4]{#1#4 (#3)}
</PRE>
Note that the additional text is placed after <code>#1</code>, so
<code>\gls{distance}['s]</code> will produce "distance's (km)"
rather than "distance (km)'s" which looks a bit odd (even though
it may be in the context of "the distance (km) is measured between
the two points" -- but in this instance it would be better not to
use a contraction).
<P>
Note also that all of the link text<A NAME="6781"></A> will be formatted according
to <TT>\glstextformat</TT><A NAME="6783"></A> (described earlier). So if you do, say:
<PRE>
\renewcommand{\glstextformat}[1]{\textbf{#1}}
\renewcommand{\glsdisplayfirst}[4]{#1#4 (#3)}
</PRE>
then <code>\gls{distance}</code> will produce "<B>distance (km)</B>".
<P>
If you have multiple glossaries, changing <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> and
<TT>\glsdisplay</TT> will change the way entries for all of the
glossaries appear when using the commands <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="6787"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="6790"></A>, their
uppercase variants and <TT>\glsdisp</TT><A NAME="6793"></A>. If you only
want the change to affect entries for a given glossary, then you need
to use
<P>
<TT>\defglsdisplay[</TT><EM>type</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>definition</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
and
<P>
<TT>\defglsdisplayfirst[</TT><EM>type</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>definition</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
instead of redefining <TT>\glsdisplay</TT> and <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT>.
<P>
Both <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT> and <TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT> take two arguments:
the first (which is optional) is the glossary's label<A NAME="tex2html24"
HREF="#foot4350"><SUP>7</SUP></A> and the second is how the term should be
displayed when it is invoked using commands <TT>\gls</TT>,
<TT>\glspl</TT>, their uppercase variants and <TT>\glsdisp</TT>. This is similar to the way <TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT> was
redefined above.
<P>
For example, suppose you have created a new glossary called
<TT>notation</TT> and you want to change the way the entry is
displayed on first use<A NAME="6795"></A> so that it includes the symbol, you can
do:
<PRE>
\defglsdisplayfirst[notation]{#1#4 (denoted #3)}
</PRE>
Now suppose you have defined an entry as follows:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{set}{type=notation,
name=set,
description={A collection of objects},
symbol={$S$}
}
</PRE>
The first time you reference this entry using <TT>\gls</TT> it
will be displayed as: "set (denoted <I>S</I>)"
(similarly for <TT>\glspl</TT> and the uppercase variants).
<P>
Remember that if you use the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="6800"></A> key, you need to use a
glossary style that displays the symbol, as many of the styles ignore
it. In addition, if you want either the description or symbol to appear
in the link text<A NAME="6802"></A>, you will have to disable the
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sanitize">sanitization</A>
of these keys and protect fragile commands.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION00034200000000000000">
Enabling and disabling hyperlinks to glossary entries</A>
</H3>
<P>
If you load the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="6807"></A> or <TT>html</TT><A NAME="6810"></A> packages prior to
loading the <TT>glossaries</TT> package, commands such as <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="6814"></A>
and <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="6817"></A>, described above, will automatically have hyperlinks
to the relevant glossary entry, unless the <TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="6820"></A>
option has been set to <TT>false</TT>. You can disable or enable links using:
<P>
<TT>\glsdisablehyper</TT>
<P>
and
<P>
<TT>\glsenablehyper</TT>
<P>
respectively. The effect can be localised by placing the commands
within a group. Note that you should only use <TT>\glsenablehyper</TT>
if the commands <TT>\hyperlink</TT><A NAME="6823"></A> and <TT>\hypertarget</TT><A NAME="6826"></A> have been
defined (for example, by the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="6829"></A> package).
<P>
You can disable just the first use links using the package
option <TT>hyperfirst=false</TT><A NAME="6839"></A>. Note that this option only
affects commands that recognise the first use<A NAME="6840"></A> flag, for example
<TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="6842"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="6845"></A> and <TT>\glsdisp</TT><A NAME="6848"></A> but not <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="6851"></A>.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION00035000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:glsadd"></A>
<BR>
Adding an Entry to the Glossary Without Generating Text
</H2>
<P>
It is possible to add a line in the glossary file without
generating any text at that point in the document using:
<P>
<TT>\glsadd[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
This is similar to <TT>\glslink</TT><A NAME="6857"></A>, only it doesn't produce
any text (so therefore, there is no <TT>hyper</TT><A NAME="6860"></A> key
available in <I>options</I> but all the other options that can
be used with <TT>\glslink</TT> can be passed to <TT>\glsadd</TT>).
For example, to add a page range to the glossary number list for the
entry whose label is given by <TT>set</TT>:
<PRE>
\glsadd[format=(]{set}
Lots of text about sets spanning many pages.
\glsadd[format=)]{set}
</PRE>
<P>
To add all entries that have been defined, use:
<P>
<TT>\glsaddall[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
The optional argument is the same as for <TT>\glsadd</TT>, except
there is also a key <TT>types</TT><A NAME="6863"></A> which can be
used to specify which glossaries to use. This should be a
comma separated list. For example, if you only want to add
all the entries belonging to the list of acronyms (specified by
the glossary type <TT>\acronymtype</TT>) and a list of
notation (specified by the glossary type <TT>notation</TT>) then you can
do:
<PRE>
\glsaddall[types={\acronymtype,notation}]
</PRE>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION00036000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:crossref"></A>
<BR>
Cross-Referencing Entries
</H2>
<P>
There are several ways of cross-referencing entries in the
glossary:
<P>
<OL>
<LI>You can use commands such as <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="6869"></A> in the
entries description. For example:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{apple}{name=apple,
description={firm, round fruit. See also \gls{pear}}}
</PRE>
Note that with this method, if you don't use the
cross-referenced term in the glossary, you will need two runs of
<TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6872"></A>:
<PRE>
latex filename
makeglossaries filename
latex filename
makeglossaries filename
latex filename
</PRE>
<P>
</LI>
<LI>As described <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:newglosentry">earlier</A>,
you can use the <TT>see</TT><A NAME="6875"></A> key when you define the entry. For
example:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{MaclaurinSeries}{name={Maclaurin series},
description={Series expansion},
see={TaylorsTheorem}}
</PRE>
Note that in this case, the entry with the <TT>see</TT><A NAME="6878"></A> key will
automatically be added to the glossary, but the cross-referenced
entry won't. You therefore need to ensure that you use the
cross-referenced term with the commands described in
Links to Glossary Entries or
Adding an Entry to the Glossary
Without Generating Text.
<P>
You can optionally override the "see" tag using square brackets
at the start of the <TT>see</TT><A NAME="6881"></A> value. For example:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{MaclaurinSeries}{name={Maclaurin series},
description={Series expansion},
see=[see also]{TaylorsTheorem}}
</PRE>
<P>
</LI>
<LI>After you have defined the entry, use
<P>
<TT>\glssee[</TT><EM>tag</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>xr label list</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
where <I>xr label list</I> is a comma-separated list of entry
labels to be cross-referenced, <I>label</I> is the label of the
entry doing the cross-referencing and <I>tag</I> is the "see" tag.
For example:
<PRE>
\glssee[see also]{series}{FourierSeries,TaylorsTheorem}
</PRE>
Note that this automatically adds the entry given by <I>label</I> to
the glossary but doesn't add the cross-referenced entries (specified
by <I>xr label list</I>) to the glossary.
</LI>
</OL>
<P>
In both cases 2 and 3 above, the cross-referenced information appears
in the number list<A NAME="6883"></A>, whereas in case 1, the cross-referenced
information appears in the description. In cases 2 and 3, the
default text for the "see" tag is given by <TT>\seename</TT><A NAME="6885"></A>.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION00037000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:glsnolink"></A>
<BR>
Using Glossary Terms Without Links
</H2>
<P>
The commands described in this section display entry details without
adding any information to the glossary. They don't use
<TT>\glstextformat</TT>, they don't have any optional arguments,
they don't affect the first use flag<A NAME="6890"></A> and, apart from <TT>\glshyperlink</TT><A NAME="6892"></A>, they don't produce
hyperlinks.
<P>
<TT>\glsentryname{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsentryname{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
These commands display the name of the glossary entry given by
<I>label</I>, as specified by the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="6895"></A> key.
<TT>\Glsentryname</TT> makes the first letter uppercase.
<P>
<TT>\glsentrytext{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsentrytext{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
These commands display the subsequent use text for the glossary entry
given by <I>label</I>, as specified by the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="6898"></A> key.
<TT>\Glsentrytext</TT> makes the first letter uppercase.
<P>
<TT>\glsentryplural{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsentryplural{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
These commands display the subsequent use plural text for the glossary
entry given by <I>label</I>, as specified by the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="6901"></A> key.
<TT>\Glsentryplural</TT> makes the first letter uppercase.
<P>
<TT>\glsentryfirst{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsentryfirst{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
These commands display the first use text<A NAME="6903"></A> for the glossary entry
given by <I>label</I>, as specified by the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="6905"></A> key.
<TT>\Glsentryfirst</TT> makes the first letter uppercase.
<P>
<TT>\glsentryfirstplural{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsentryfirstplural{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
These commands display the plural form of the first use text<A NAME="6907"></A> for the
glossary entry given by <I>label</I>, as specified by the
<TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="6909"></A> key. <TT>\Glsentryfirstplural</TT> makes the first
letter uppercase.
<P>
<TT>\glsentrydesc{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsentrydesc{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
These commands display the description for the glossary entry given by
<I>label</I>. <TT>\Glsentrydesc</TT> makes the first letter uppercase.
<P>
<TT>\glsentrydescplural{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsentrydescplural{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
These commands display the plural description for the glossary entry
given by <I>label</I>. <TT>\Glsentrydescplural</TT> makes the first letter
uppercase.
<P>
<TT>\glsentrysymbol{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsentrysymbol{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
These commands display the symbol for the glossary entry given by
<I>label</I>. <TT>\Glsentrysymbol</TT> makes the first letter uppercase.
<P>
<TT>\glsentrysymbolplural{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsentrysymbolplural{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
These commands display the plural symbol for the glossary entry given by
<I>label</I>. <TT>\Glsentrysymbolplural</TT> makes the first letter uppercase.
<P>
<TT>\glsentryuseri{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsentryuseri{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glsentryuserii{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsentryuserii{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glsentryuseriii{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsentryuseriii{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glsentryuseriv{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsentryuseriv{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glsentryuserv{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsentryuserv{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glsentryuservi{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\Glsentryuservi{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
These commands display the value of the user keys for the glossary entry given by
<I>label</I>.
<P>
<TT>\glshyperlink[</TT><EM>link text</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
This command provides a hyperlink to the glossary entry given by
<I>label</I> <B>but does not add any information to the
glossary file</B>. The link text is given by
<TT>\glsentryname</TT><A NAME="6912"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT> by default, but can be overridden
using the optional argument.
If you use <TT>\glshyperlink</TT>, you need to ensure that the relevant
entry has been added to the glossary using any of the
commands described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glslink">Links to Glossary Entries</A> or
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsadd">Adding an Entry to the Glossary Without Generating
Text</A> otherwise you will end up with a broken
link.
<P>
For further information see the
section "Displaying entry details without adding information to
the glossary" in the document <TT><A NAME="tex2html25"
HREF="glossaries.pdf">glossaries.pdf</A></TT>.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION00038000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:printglossary"></A>
<BR>
Displaying a glossary
</H2>
<P>
The command <TT>\printglossaries</TT> will display all the
glossaries in the order in which they were defined.
Note that no glossaries will appear until
you have either used the Perl script <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6918"></A>
or have directly used <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6921"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6924"></A> (as
described in
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeglossaries">Generating the
Associated Glossary Files</A>). If the glossary
still does not appear after you re-LaTeX your document, check the
<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="6927"></A>/<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="6930"></A> log files to see if there is a
problem. Remember that you also need to use the command
<TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="6933"></A> in the preamble to enable the glossaries.
<P>
An individual glossary can be displayed using:
<P>
<TT>\printglossary[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
where <I>options</I> is a <I>key</I>=<I>value</I> list of options.
The following keys are available:
<DL>
<DT><STRONG><TT>type</TT><A NAME="6936"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>The value of this key
specifies which glossary to print. If omitted, the default
glossary is assumed. For example, to print the list of acronyms:
<PRE>
\printglossary[type=\acronymtype]
</PRE>
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>title</TT><A NAME="6939"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This is the glossary's
title (overriding the title specified when the glossary was
defined).
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>toctitle</TT><A NAME="6942"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This is the title
to use for the table of contents (if the <TT>toc</TT><A NAME="6950"></A> package
option has been used). It may also be used for the page header,
depending on the page style. If omitted, the glossary title is used.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>style</TT><A NAME="6954"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This specifies which
glossary style to use for this glossary, overriding the effect
of the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="6962"></A> package option or <TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="6966"></A>.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="6969"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>This specifies
whether to use a numbered section for this glossary, overriding
the effect of the <TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="6977"></A> package option. This
key has the same syntax as the <TT>numberedsection</TT><A NAME="6986"></A> package
option, described <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:pkgopts">earlier</A>.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="6990"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>Unlike the package option
of the same name, this key is a boolean key. If true (<code>nonumberlist=true</code>) the numberlist
is suppressed for this glossary. If false (<code>nonumberlist=false</code>) the numberlist is
displayed for this glossary. If no value is supplied, true is
assumed.
<P>
</DD>
</DL>
<P>
Information can be added to the start of the glossary (after the
title and before the main body of the glossary) by redefining
<TT>\glossarypreamble</TT>. For example:
<PRE>
\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{Numbers in italic indicate
primary definitions.}
</PRE>
This needs to be done before the glossary is displayed using
<TT>\printglossaries</TT> or <TT>\printglossary</TT>. Note that if you
want a different preamble for each glossary, you will need to
use a separate <TT>\printglossary</TT> for each glossary and change
the definition of <TT>\glossarypreamble</TT> between each glossary.
For example:
<PRE>
\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{Numbers in italic indicate
primary definitions.}
\printglossary
\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{}
\printglossary[type=acronym]
</PRE>
Alternatively, you can do something like:
<PRE>
\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{Numbers in italic indicate
primary definitions.\gdef\glossarypreamble{}}
\printglossaries
</PRE>
which will print the preamble text for the first glossary and
change the preamble to do nothing for subsequent glossaries.
(Note that <TT>\gdef</TT> is required as the glossary is placed within
a group.)
<P>
There is an analogous command
called <TT>\glossarypostamble</TT> which is placed at the end of each
glossary.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION00038100000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:glsnamefont"></A>
<BR>
Changing the way the entry name appears in the glossary
</H3>
<P>
Within each glossary, each entry name is
formatted according to <TT>\glsnamefont</TT> which takes one argument:
the entry name. This command is always used regardless of the
glossary style. By default, <TT>\glsnamefont</TT> simply displays its
argument in whatever the surrounding font happens to be. This means
that in the list-like glossary styles (defined in the
<TT>glossary-list</TT><A NAME="6996"></A> style file) the name will appear in bold, since
the name is placed in the optional argument of <TT>\item</TT>, whereas in
the tabular styles (defined in the <TT>glossary-long</TT><A NAME="6999"></A> and
<TT>glossary-super</TT><A NAME="7002"></A> style files) the name will appear in the
normal font. The hierarchical glossary styles (defined in the
<TT>glossary-tree</TT><A NAME="7005"></A> style file) also set the name in bold.
<P>
For example, suppose you want all the entry names to appear in
medium weight small caps, then you can do:
<PRE>
\renewcommand{\glsnamefont}[1]{\textsc{\mdseries #1}}
</PRE>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION00038200000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:xindy"></A>
<BR>
Xindy
</H3>
<P>
If you want to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7011"></A> to sort the glossary, you
must use the package option <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7019"></A>:
<PRE>
\usepackage[xindy]{glossaries}
</PRE>
This ensures that the glossary information is written in
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7023"></A> syntax.
<P>
The section
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:makeglossaries">Generating the Associated Glossary
Files</A> covers how to use the external
indexing application. This section covers the commands provided
by the <TT>glossaries</TT> package that allow you to adjust the
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7027"></A> style file (<TT>.xdy</TT><A NAME="7030"></A>) and parameters.
<P>
To assist writing information to the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7032"></A> style
file, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package provides the following
commands:
<P>
<TT>\glsopenbrace</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glsclosebrace</TT>
<P>
which produce an open and closing brace. (This is needed because
<code>\{</code> and <code>\}</code> don't expand to a simple brace character
when written to a file.)
<P>
In addition, if you are using a package that makes the double
quote character active (e.g. <TT>ngerman</TT><A NAME="7036"></A>) you can use:
<P>
<TT>\glsquote{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
which will produce <code>"</code><I>text</I><code>"</code>. Alternatively,
you can use <code>\string"</code> to write the double-quote character.
This document assumes that the double quote character has not been
made active, so the examples just use <code>"</code> for clarity.
<P>
If you want greater control over the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7039"></A> style file than
is available through the LaTeX commands provided by the
<TT>glossaries</TT> package, you will need to edit the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7043"></A>
style file. In
which case, you must use <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="7046"></A> to prevent the style file from
being overwritten by the <TT>glossaries</TT> package. For additional
information about <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7050"></A>, read the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7053"></A>
documentation.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H4><A NAME="SECTION00038210000000000000">
Language and Encodings</A>
</H4>
When you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7059"></A>, you need to specify the language
and encoding used (unless you have written your own custom
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7062"></A> style file that defines the relevant alphabet
and sort rules). If you use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="7065"></A>,
this information is obtained from the document's auxiliary
(<TT>.aux</TT><A NAME="7068"></A>) file. The <TT>glossaries</TT> package attempts to
find the root language, but in the event that it gets it wrong or if
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7071"></A> doesn't support that language, then you can
specify the language using:
<P>
<TT>\GlsSetXdyLanguage[</TT><EM>glossary type</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>language</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
where <I>language</I> is the name of the language. The
optional argument can be used if you have multiple glossaries
in different languages. If <I>glossary type</I> is omitted, it
will be applied to all glossaries, otherwise the language
setting will only be applied to the glossary given by
<I>glossary type</I>.
<P>
If the <TT>inputenc</TT><A NAME="7074"></A> package is used, the encoding will be
obtained from the value of <TT>\inputencodingname</TT><A NAME="7077"></A>.
Alternatively, you can specify the encoding using:
<P>
<TT>\GlsSetXdyCodePage{</TT><EM>code</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
where <I>code</I> is the name of the encoding. For example:
<PRE>
\GlsSetXdyCodePage{utf8}
</PRE>
<P>
Note that you can also specify the language and encoding using
the package option
<code>xindy={language=</code><I>lang</I><code>,codepage=</code><I>code</I><code>}</code>.
For example:
<PRE>
\usepackage[xindy={language=english,codepage=utf8}]{glossaries}
</PRE>
<P>
If you write your own custom <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7080"></A> style file that
includes the language settings, you need to set the language
to nothing:
<PRE>
\GlsSetXdyLanguage{}
</PRE>
(and remember to use <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="7083"></A> to prevent the style file from
being overwritten).
<P>
The commands <TT>\GlsSetXdyLanguage</TT> and <TT>\GlsSetXdyCodePage</TT>
have no effect if you don't use <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="7086"></A>. If
you call <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7089"></A> without <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="7092"></A> you
need to remember to set the language and encoding using the
<TT>-L</TT> and <TT>-C</TT> switches.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H4><A NAME="SECTION00038220000000000000">
Locations and Number lists</A>
</H4>
<P>
The most likely attributes used in the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="7098"></A>
key (<TT>textrm</TT><A NAME="7101"></A>, <TT>hyperrm</TT><A NAME="7104"></A> etc) are automatically added
to the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7107"></A> style file, but if you want to use another
attribute, you need to add it using:
<P>
<TT>\GlsAddXdyAttribute{</TT><EM>name</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
where <I>name</I> is the name of the attribute, as used in
the <TT>format</TT><A NAME="7110"></A> key. For example, suppose I want a
bold, italic, hyperlinked location. I first need to define a
command that will do this:
<PRE>
\newcommand*{\hyperbfit}[1]{\textit{\hyperbf{#1}}}
</PRE>
but with <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7113"></A>, I also need to add this as an allowed
attribute:
<PRE>
\GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperbfit}
</PRE>
<P>
Note that <TT>\GlsAddXdyAttribute</TT> has no effect if <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="7116"></A> is
used or if <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="7119"></A> is omitted.
<P>
<TT>\GlsAddXdyAttribute</TT> must be used before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="7122"></A>.
<P>
If the location numbers don't get expanded to a simple Arabic or
Roman number or a letter from a, ..., z or A, ..., Z, then
you need to add a location style in the appropriate format.
<P>
For example, suppose you want the page numbers written as words
rather than digits and you use the <TT>fmtcount</TT><A NAME="7125"></A> package to
do this. You can redefine <TT>\thepage</TT><A NAME="7128"></A> as follows:
<PRE>
\renewcommand*{\thepage}{\Numberstring{page}}
</PRE>
This gets expanded to <code>\protect \Numberstringnum </code><TT>{</TT><EM>n</EM><TT>}</TT>
where <I>n</I> is the Arabic page number. This means that you need to
define a new location that has that form:
<PRE>
\GlsAddXdyLocation{Numberstring}{:sep "\string\protect\space
\string\Numberstringnum\space\glsopenbrace"
"arabic-numbers" :sep "\glsclosebrace"}
</PRE>
Note that it's necessary to use <TT>\space</TT> to indicate that
spaces also appear in the format, since, unlike T<SMALL>E</SMALL>X,
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7131"></A> doesn't ignore spaces after control sequences.
<P>
Note that <TT>\GlsAddXdyLocation</TT> has no effect if <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="7134"></A> is
used or if <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="7137"></A> is omitted.
<P>
<TT>\GlsAddXdyLocation</TT> must be used before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="7140"></A>.
<P>
In the number list<A NAME="7142"></A>, the locations are sorted according to
type. The default ordering is:
<TT>roman-page-numbers</TT> (e.g. i),
<TT>arabic-page-numbers</TT> (e.g. 1),
<TT>arabic-section-numbers</TT> (e.g. 1.1 if the compositor
is a full stop or 1-1 if the compositor is a hyphen<A NAME="tex2html26"
HREF="#foot4479"><SUP>8</SUP></A>),
<TT>alpha-page-numbers</TT> (e.g. a),
<TT>Roman-page-numbers</TT> (e.g. I),
<TT>Alpha-page-numbers</TT> (e.g. A),
<TT>Appendix-page-numbers</TT> (e.g. A.1 if the Alpha compositor
is a full stop or A-1 if the Alpha compositor is a
hyphen<A NAME="tex2html27"
HREF="#foot4480"><SUP>9</SUP></A>),
user defined location names (as specified by
<TT>\GlsAddXdyLocation</TT><A NAME="7150"></A> in the order in which they were defined),
<TT>see</TT> (cross-referenced entries).
This ordering can be changed using:
<P>
<TT>\GlsSetXdyLocationClassOrder{</TT><EM>location names</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
where each location name is delimited by double quote marks and
separated by white space.
For example:
<PRE>
\GlsSetXdyLocationClassOrder{
"arabic-page-numbers"
"arabic-section-numbers"
"roman-page-numbers"
"Roman-page-numbers"
"alpha-page-numbers"
"Alpha-page-numbers"
"Appendix-page-numbers"
"see"
}
</PRE>
<P>
Note that <TT>\GlsSetXdyLocationClassOrder</TT> has no effect if
<TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="7153"></A> is used or if <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="7156"></A> is omitted.
<P>
<TT>\GlsSetXdyLocationClassOrder</TT> must be used before
<TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="7159"></A>.
<P>
If a number list<A NAME="7161"></A> consists of a sequence of consecutive
numbers, the range will be concatenated. The
number of consecutive locations that causes a range formation
defaults to 2, but can be changed using:
<P>
<TT>\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength{</TT><EM>n</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
For example:
<PRE>
\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength{3}
</PRE>
The argument may also be the keyword <TT>none</TT>, to indicate that
there should be no range formations. See the <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7163"></A>
manual for further details on range formations.
<P>
Note that <TT>\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength</TT> has no effect if <TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="7166"></A>
is used or if <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="7169"></A> is omitted.
<P>
<TT>\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength</TT> must be used before
<TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="7172"></A>.
<P>
See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A> for
further details.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H4><A NAME="SECTION00038230000000000000">
Glossary Groups</A>
</H4>
The glossary is divided into groups according to the first
letter of the sort key. The <TT>glossaries</TT> package also adds
a number group by default, unless you suppress it in the
<TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7184"></A> package option. For example:
<PRE>
\usepackage[xindy={glsnumbers=false}]{glossaries}
</PRE>
Any entry that doesn't go in one of the letter groups or the
number group is placed in the default group.
<P>
If you have a number group, the default behaviour is to locate
it before the "A" letter group. If you are not using a
Roman alphabet, you can change this using
<BR>
<BR><TT>\GlsSetXdyFirstLetterAfterDigits{</TT><EM>letter</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
Note that <TT>\GlsSetXdyFirstLetterAfterDigits</TT> has no effect if
<TT>\noist</TT><A NAME="7188"></A> is used or if <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="7191"></A> is omitted.
<P>
<TT>\GlsSetXdyFirstLetterAfterDigits</TT> must be used before
<TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="7194"></A>.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION00039000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:newglossary"></A>
<BR>
Defining New Glossaries
</H2>
<P>
A new glossary can be defined using:
<P>
<TT>\newglossary[</TT><EM>log-ext</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>name</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>in-ext</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>out-ext</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>title</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>counter</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
where <I>name</I> is the label to assign to this glossary. The arguments
<I>in-ext</I> and <I>out-ext</I> specify the extensions to give to the
input and output files for that glossary, <I>title</I> is the default
title for this new glossary and the final optional argument
<I>counter</I> specifies which counter to use for the associated number
lists<A NAME="7199"></A> (see also <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:numberlists">Number Lists</A>). The
first optional argument specifies the extension for the
<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="7201"></A> or <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="7204"></A> transcript file (this
information is only used by <TT>makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="7207"></A> which picks up
the information from the auxiliary file).
<P>
Note that the main (default) glossary is automatically created as:
<PRE>
\newglossary{main}{gls}{glo}{\glossaryname}
</PRE>
so it can be identified by the label <TT>main</TT> (unless the
<TT>nomain</TT><A NAME="7215"></A> package option is used). Using the
<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="7224"></A> package option is equivalent to:
<PRE>
\newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname}
</PRE>
so it can be identified by the label <TT>acronym</TT>. If you are
not sure whether the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="7233"></A> option has been used, you
can identify the list of acronyms by the command
<TT>\acronymtype</TT> which is set to
<TT>acronym</TT>, if the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="7242"></A> option has been used,
otherwise it is set to <TT>main</TT>. Note that if you are using
the main glossary as your list of acronyms, you need to declare
it as a list of acronyms using the package option
<TT>acronymlists</TT><A NAME="7251"></A>.
<P>
All glossaries must be defined before <TT>\makeglossaries</TT><A NAME="7255"></A> to
ensure that the relevant output files are opened.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION000310000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:acronyms"></A>
<BR>
Acronyms
</H2>
<P>
You may have noticed in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:newglosentry">Defining Glossary Entries</A> that when you
specify a new entry, you can specify alternate text to use when
the term is first used<A NAME="7260"></A> in the document. This provides a useful
means to define acronyms. For convenience, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package
defines the command:
<P>
<TT>\newacronym[</TT><EM>key-val list</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
By default, this is equivalent to:
<P>
<TT>
<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT></TT> <TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{type=<TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="7263"></A>,
<BR>
name=</TT> <TT>{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>},
<BR>
description=</TT> <TT>{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>},
<BR>
text=</TT> <TT>{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>},
<BR>
first={</TT> <I>long</I><TT> (</TT> <I>abbrv</I><TT>)},
<BR>
plural={</TT> <I>abbrv</I><TT><TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT>},
<BR>
firstplural={</TT> <I>long</I><TT><TT>\glspluralsuffix\space</TT>
(</TT> <I>abbrv</I><TT><TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT>)},
<BR></TT> <I>key-val list</I><TT>}</TT>
<P>
As mentioned in the previous section, the command <TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="7266"></A>
is the name of the glossary in which the acronyms should appear. If
the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="7274"></A> package option has been used, this will be
<TT>acronym</TT>, otherwise it will be <TT>main</TT>. The acronyms
can then be used in exactly the same way as any other glossary
entry. If you want more than one list of acronyms, you must
identify the others using the package options <TT>acronymlists</TT><A NAME="7283"></A>.
This ensures that options such as <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7292"></A> and
<TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="7301"></A> work for the additional lists of acronyms.
<P>
<B>Note:</B> since <TT>\newacronym</TT> sets <code>type=\acronymtype</code>,
if you want to load a file containing acronym definitions using
<TT>\loadglsentries[</TT><EM>type</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>filename</EM><TT>}</TT>, the optional argument
<I>type</I> will not have an effect unless you explicitly set the
type as <code>type=\glsdefaulttype</code> in the optional argument to
<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="7305"></A>. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:loadglsentries">earlier</A> for details.
<P>
For example, the following defines the acronym IDN:
<PRE>
\newacronym{idn}{IDN}{identification number}
</PRE>
This is equivalent to:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{idn}{type=\acronymtype,
name={IDN},
description={identification number},
text={IDN},
first={identification number (IDN)},
plural={IDNs},
firstplural={identification numbers (IDNs)}}
</PRE>
so <code>\gls{idn}</code> will produce "identification number (IDN)" on
first use<A NAME="7307"></A> and "IDN" on subsequent uses.
<P>
This section describes acronyms that have been defined using
<TT>\newacronym</TT>. If you prefer to define all your acronyms using
<TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> explicitly, then you should skip this section
and ignore the package options: <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="7314"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="7323"></A>,
<TT>description</TT><A NAME="7332"></A>, <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="7341"></A> and <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7350"></A>, as these
options change the definition of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="7354"></A> for common acronym
formats as well as the way that the link text is displayed (see
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsdisplay">earlier</A>).
Likewise you should ignore the package option <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="7362"></A>
and the new commands described in this section,
such as <TT>\acrshort</TT>, as they vary according to the definition of
<TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="7366"></A>.
<P>
If you use any of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="7374"></A>,
<TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="7383"></A>, <TT>description</TT><A NAME="7392"></A> or
<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7401"></A>, the acronyms will be displayed in the document
using:
<P>
<TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
and
<P>
<TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
where <TT>\firstacronymfont</TT> is applied on first use<A NAME="7404"></A> and
<TT>\acronymfont</TT> is applied on subsequent use. Note that if you
don't use any of the above package options, changing the definition
of <TT>\acronymfont</TT> or <TT>\firstacronymfont</TT> will have no effect. In
this case, the recommended route is to use either the
<TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="7411"></A> or the <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="7420"></A> package option and
redefine <TT>\acronymfont</TT> and <TT>\firstacronymfont</TT> as required.
(The <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="7429"></A> option sets the default plural suffix in an
upright font to cancel the effect of <TT>\textsc</TT>, whereas
<TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="7438"></A> sets the suffix in the surrounding font.)
For example, if you want acronyms in a normal font on first use and
emphasized on subsequent use, do:
<PRE>
\usepackage[smaller]{glossaries}
\renewcommand*{\firstacronymfont}[1]{#1}
\renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\emph{#1}}
</PRE>
(Note that it is for this reason that the <TT>relsize</TT><A NAME="7442"></A> package
is not automatically loaded when selecting the
<TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="7450"></A> package option.)
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:acronymsettings">Table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:acronymsettings">4</A> lists the package options that govern
the acronym styles and how the <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT><A NAME="7457"></A> keys are used
to store <I>long</I> (the long form) and <I>abbrv</I> (the short
form). Note that the <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="7465"></A> option redefines
<TT>\acronymfont</TT> so that it sets its argument using <TT>\textsc</TT> (so
you should use lower case characters in <I>abbrv</I>) and the
<TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="7474"></A> option redefines <TT>\acronymfont</TT> to use
<TT>\textsmaller</TT>,<A NAME="tex2html28"
HREF="#foot4398"><SUP>10</SUP></A> otherwise <TT>\acronymfont</TT> simply displays its argument in
the surrounding font.
<P>
<BR><P></P>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
<A NAME="tab:acronymsettings"></A>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
<A NAME="4399"></A>
<TABLE CELLPADDING=3>
<CAPTION><STRONG>Table 4:</STRONG>
Package options governing <TT>\newacronym</TT> and how the
information is stored in the keys for <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT></CAPTION>
<TR><TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Package Option </B></TH>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>first</TT><A NAME="7479"></A> key</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>text</TT><A NAME="7482"></A> key</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="7485"></A> key</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="7488"></A> key</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="7496"></A>,<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7505"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">user supplied</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="7514"></A>,<TT>dua</TT><A NAME="7523"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">user supplied</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>description</TT><A NAME="7532"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">user supplied</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7541"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="7550"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="7559"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>dua</TT><A NAME="7568"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT">None of the above</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I> (<I>abbrv</I>)</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>abbrv</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><I>long</I></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"> </TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</DIV>
</DIV>
<BR>
<P>
In case you can't remember which key stores the long or short forms
(or their plurals) the <TT>glossaries</TT> package provides the
commands:
<UL>
<LI><TT>\glsshortkey</TT>
The key used to store the short form.
</LI>
<LI><TT>\glsshortpluralkey</TT>
The key used to store the plural version of the short form.
</LI>
<LI><TT>\glslongkey</TT>
The key used to store the long form.
</LI>
<LI><TT>\glslongpluralkey</TT>
The key used to store the plural version of the long form.
</LI>
</UL>
These can be used in the optional argument of <TT>\newacronym</TT>
to override the defaults. For example:
<PRE>
\newacronym[\glslongpluralkey={diagonal matrices}]{dm}{DM}{diagonal
matrix}
</PRE>
If the first use<A NAME="7572"></A> uses the plural form, <code>\glspl{dm}</code> will
display: diagonal matrices (DMs).
<P>
Each of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="7579"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="7588"></A>,
<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7597"></A>, <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="7606"></A>
and <TT>description</TT><A NAME="7615"></A> use <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT><A NAME="7619"></A> and
<TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="7622"></A> (described <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsdisplay">earlier</A>)
to change the way the link text is displayed. This means that these
package options only work for the glossary type given by
<TT>\acronymtype</TT>. If you have multiple lists of acronyms, you
will need to make the appropriate changes for each additional
glossary type.
<P>
<DL>
<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="7630"></A>,<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7639"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>
When these two package options are used together, the first use<A NAME="7642"></A> displays
the entry as:
<BR>
<BR><TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I><TT>\footnote{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT>
<BR>
<BR>
while subsequent use displays the entry as:
<BR>
<BR><TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I>
<BR>
<BR>
where <I>insert</I> indicates the text supplied in the final
optional argument to <TT>\gls</TT>, <TT>\glspl</TT> or their uppercase
variants.
<P>
In this case, the long form is stored in the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="7644"></A> key.
This means that the long form will not be displayed in the list of
acronyms unless you use a glossary style that displays the entry's
symbol (for example, the <TT>index</TT><A NAME="7647"></A> style). Entries will
be sorted according to the short form.
<P>
Note also that when these two package options are used (in the
given order), the <TT>glossaries</TT> package additionally implements the
<TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="7655"></A> option using
<A NAME="7664"></A><A NAME="7671"></A><code>sanitize={description=false,symbol=false}</code>, so
remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>dua</TT><A NAME="7678"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>
The <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="7687"></A> package option always displays the expanded
form and so may not be used with <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7696"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="7705"></A> or
<TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="7714"></A>. Both first use<A NAME="7717"></A> and subsequent use displays the
entry in the form:
<BR>
<BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I>
<BR>
<BR>
If the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="7724"></A> package option is also used, the
<TT>name</TT><A NAME="7728"></A> key is set to the long form, otherwise the
<TT>name</TT><A NAME="7731"></A> key is set to the short form and the
<TT>description</TT><A NAME="7734"></A> key is set to the long form. In both
cases the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="7737"></A> is set to the short form. Therefore,
if you use the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="7745"></A> package option and you want
the short form to appear in the list of acronyms, you will need
to use a glossary style that displays the entry's symbol (for
example, the <TT>index</TT><A NAME="7749"></A> style). Entries will be sorted
according to the long form if the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="7756"></A> option
is used, otherwise they will be sorted according to the
short form (unless overridden by the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="7760"></A> key in
the optional argument of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="7763"></A>).
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>description</TT><A NAME="7771"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>
This package option displays the entry on first use<A NAME="7774"></A> as:
<BR>
<BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> (<TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT>)
<BR>
<BR>
while subsequent use displays the entry as:
<BR>
<BR><TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I>
<BR>
<BR>
Note also that if this package option is used, the <TT>glossaries</TT>
package additionally implements the option
<A NAME="7782"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so
remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms.
<P>
Note that with this option, you need to specify the description
using the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="7784"></A> key in the optional argument
of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="7787"></A>. When this option is used without
the <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7795"></A> or <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="7804"></A> options, the name field
is specified as
<P>
<TT>\acrnameformat{</TT><EM>short</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
This defaults to <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="7808"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>short</EM><TT>}</TT>, which means that the
long form will not appear in the list of acronyms by default.
To change this, you need to redefine <TT>\acrnameformat</TT><A NAME="7811"></A> as
appropriate. For example, to display the long form followed
by the short form in parentheses do:
<PRE>
\renewcommand*{\acrnameformat}[2]{#2 (\acronymfont{#1})}
</PRE>
Note that even if you redefine <TT>\acrnameformat</TT><A NAME="7814"></A>, the
entries will be sorted according to the short form, unless you
override this using the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="7817"></A> key in the optional
argument to <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="7820"></A>.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7828"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>
This package option displays the entry on first use<A NAME="7831"></A> as:
<BR>
<BR><TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I><TT>\footnote{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT>
<BR>
<BR>
while subsequent use displays the entry as:
<BR>
<BR><TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I>
<BR>
<BR>
Acronyms will be sorted according to the short form.
<P>
Note also that if this package option is used, the <TT>glossaries</TT>
package additionally implements the option
<A NAME="7839"></A><code>sanitize={description=false}</code>, so
remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms.
<P>
Note that on first use<A NAME="7840"></A>, it is the long form in the footnote that
links to the relevant glossary entry (where hyperlinks are enabled),
whereas on subsequent use, the acronym links to the relevant
glossary entry. It is possible to change this to make the acronym
on first use<A NAME="7841"></A> have the hyperlink instead of the footnote, but
since the footnote marker will also be a hyperlink, you will
have two hyperlinks in immediate succession. This can be
ambiguous where the hyperlinks are coloured rather than boxed.
The code required to change the first use<A NAME="7842"></A> to make the
acronym a hyperlink is as follows:
<PRE>
\defglsdisplayfirst[\acronymtype]{%
\noexpand\protect\noexpand
\glslink[\@gls@link@opts]{\@gls@link@label}{\firstacronymfont{#1}#4}%
\noexpand\protect\noexpand\footnote{#2}}%
</PRE>
<B>Note</B> that this involves using internal commands
(i.e. commands whose name contains an <code>@</code> character), so
if this code is place in a <TT>.tex</TT> file it needs to be
placed within a <TT>\makeatletter</TT> ... <TT>\makeatother</TT> pair.
(See <A NAME="tex2html31"
HREF="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=atsigns"><TT>\@</TT> and <TT>@</TT> in macro names</A>
for further details.)
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="7849"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>
If neither the <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7858"></A> nor <TT>description</TT><A NAME="7867"></A> options
have been set, this option displays the entry on first use<A NAME="7870"></A> as:
<BR>
<BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> (<TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT>)
<BR>
<BR>
while subsequent use displays the entry as:
<BR>
<BR><TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I>
<BR>
<BR>
where <TT>\acronymfont</TT> is set to <code>\textsc{#1}</code>.
<P>
Note that since the acronym is displayed using <TT>\textsc</TT><A NAME="7872"></A>,
the short form, <I>abbrv</I>, should be specified in lower case.
<P>
Note also that if this package option is used, the <TT>glossaries</TT>
package additionally implements the option
<A NAME="7881"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so
remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="7888"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>
If neither the <TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7897"></A> nor <TT>description</TT><A NAME="7906"></A> options
have been set, this option displays the entry on first use<A NAME="7909"></A> as:
<BR>
<BR><I>long</I><I>insert</I> (<TT>\firstacronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT>)
<BR>
<BR>
while subsequent use displays the entry as:
<BR>
<BR><TT>\acronymfont{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}</TT><I>insert</I>
<BR>
<BR>
where <TT>\acronymfont</TT> is set to
<code>\textsmaller{#1}</code>.<A NAME="tex2html32"
HREF="#foot4411"><SUP>11</SUP></A>The entries will be sorted according to the short form.
<P>
Remember to load a package that defines <TT>\textsmaller</TT><A NAME="7920"></A> (such as
<TT>relsize</TT><A NAME="7923"></A>) if you want to use this option, unless you want
to redefine <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="7926"></A> to use some other formatting command.
<P>
Note also that if this package option is used, the <TT>glossaries</TT>
package additionally implements the option
<A NAME="7935"></A><code>sanitize={symbol=false}</code>, so
remember to protect fragile commands when defining acronyms.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>None of the above</STRONG></DT>
<DD>
If none of the package options <TT>smallcaps</TT><A NAME="7942"></A>, <TT>smaller</TT><A NAME="7951"></A>,
<TT>footnote</TT><A NAME="7960"></A>, <TT>dua</TT><A NAME="7969"></A> or <TT>description</TT><A NAME="7978"></A> are used,
then on first use<A NAME="7981"></A> the entry is displayed as:
<BR>
<BR><I>long</I> (<I>abbrv</I>)<I>insert</I>
<BR>
<BR>
while subsequent use displays the entry as:
<BR>
<BR><I>abbrv</I><I>insert</I>
<BR>
<BR>
Entries will be sorted according to the short form.
Note that if none of the acronym-related package options are used,
the <TT>sanitize</TT><A NAME="7988"></A> option will not be affected.
</DD>
</DL>
<P>
Recall from <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glslink">earlier</A>
that you can access the values of individual keys using commands
like <TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="7992"></A>, so it is possible to use these commands to
print just the long form or just the abbreviation without affecting
the flag that determines whether the entry has been used. However
the keys that store the long and short form vary depending on
the acronym style, so the <TT>glossaries</TT> package provides
commands that are set according to the package options. These are
as follows:
<P>
<TT>\acrshort[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\ACRshort[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\ACRshort[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
Print the abbreviated version with (if required) a hyperlink to the
relevant entry in the glossary. This is usually equivalent to
<TT>\glstext</TT><A NAME="7996"></A> (or its uppercase variants) but may additionally
put the link text within the argument to <TT>\acronymfont</TT><A NAME="7999"></A>.
<P>
<TT>\acrlong[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\ACRlong[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\ACRlong[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
Print the long version with (if required) a hyperlink to the
relevant entry in the glossary. This is may be equivalent to
<TT>\glsdesc</TT><A NAME="8002"></A>, <TT>\glssymbol</TT><A NAME="8005"></A> or <TT>\glsfirst</TT><A NAME="8008"></A> (or their uppercase
variants), depending on package options.
<P>
<TT>\acrfull[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\ACRfull[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\ACRfull[</TT><EM>options</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}[</TT><EM>insert</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
Print the long version followed by the abbreviation in brackets
with (if required) a hyperlink to the
relevant entry in the glossary.
<P>
Note that if any of the above commands produce unexpected output
and you haven't used any of the acronym-related package options,
you will need to switch off the sanitization<A NAME="8015"></A>.
For example:
<PRE>
\usepackage[sanitize=none]{glossaries}
</PRE>
However, if you do this, you must remember to protect fragile
commands when defining acronyms or glossary entries.
<P>
Note that if you change the definition of <TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="8018"></A>, you
may additionally need to change the above commands as well as
changing the way the text is displayed using <TT>\defglsdisplay</TT><A NAME="8021"></A>
and <TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT><A NAME="8024"></A>.
<P>
The package option <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="8032"></A> provides the synonyms listed
in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:shortcuts">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:shortcuts">5</A>. If any of those commands generate
an "undefined control sequence" error message, check that you
have enabled the shortcuts using the <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="8044"></A> package
option. Note that there are no shortcuts for the commands that
produce all upper case text.
<P>
<BR><P></P>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
<A NAME="tab:shortcuts"></A>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
<A NAME="4415"></A>
<TABLE CELLPADDING=3>
<CAPTION><STRONG>Table 5:</STRONG>
Synonyms provided by the package option <TT>shortcuts</TT><A NAME="8053"></A></CAPTION>
<TR><TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Shortcut Command </B></TH>
<TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Equivalent Command</B></TH>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acs</TT><A NAME="8057"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrshort</TT><A NAME="8060"></A></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acs</TT><A NAME="8063"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrshort</TT><A NAME="8066"></A></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acsp</TT><A NAME="8069"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrshortpl</TT><A NAME="8072"></A></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acsp</TT><A NAME="8075"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrshortpl</TT><A NAME="8078"></A></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acl</TT><A NAME="8081"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrlong</TT><A NAME="8084"></A></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acl</TT><A NAME="8087"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrlong</TT><A NAME="8090"></A></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\aclp</TT><A NAME="8093"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrlongpl</TT><A NAME="8096"></A></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Aclp</TT><A NAME="8099"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrlongpl</TT><A NAME="8102"></A></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acf</TT><A NAME="8105"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrfull</TT><A NAME="8108"></A></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acf</TT><A NAME="8111"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrfull</TT><A NAME="8114"></A></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acfp</TT><A NAME="8117"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acrfullpl</TT><A NAME="8120"></A></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acfp</TT><A NAME="8123"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acrfullpl</TT><A NAME="8126"></A></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\ac</TT><A NAME="8129"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="8132"></A></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Ac</TT><A NAME="8135"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="8138"></A></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\acp</TT><A NAME="8141"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="8144"></A></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Acp</TT><A NAME="8147"></A></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>\Glspl</TT><A NAME="8150"></A></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</DIV>
</DIV>
<BR>
<P>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION000310100000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:oldacronym"></A>
<BR>
Upgrading From the glossary Package
</H3>
Users of the obsolete <TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="8156"></A> package may recall that
the syntax used to define new acronyms has changed with the
replacement <TT>glossaries</TT> package. In addition, the old
<TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="8160"></A> package created the command
<TT>\</TT><I>acr-name</I> when defining the acronym <I>acr-name</I>.
<P>
In order to facilitate migrating from the old package to the new
one, the <TT>glossaries</TT> package<A NAME="tex2html34"
HREF="#foot3348"><SUP>12</SUP></A>
provides the command:
<P>
<TT>\oldacronym[</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>key-val list</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
This uses the same syntax as the <TT>glossary</TT><A NAME="8164"></A> package's
method of defining acronyms. It is equivalent to:
<BR>
<BR><TT>\newacronym</TT><A NAME="8167"></A><TT>[</TT><EM>key-val list</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>abbrv</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>long</EM><TT>}</TT>
<BR>
<BR>
In addition, <TT>\oldacronym</TT><A NAME="8170"></A> also defines the commands
<TT>\</TT><I>label</I>, which is equivalent to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="8173"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>,
and <TT>\</TT><I>label</I><TT>*</TT>, which is equivalent to
<TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="8176"></A><TT>{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>. If <I>label</I> is omitted, <I>abbrv</I>
is used. Since commands names must consist only of alphabetical
characters, <I>label</I> must also only consist of alphabetical
characters. Note that <TT>\</TT><I>label</I> doesn't allow you to use
the first optional argument of <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="8179"></A> or <TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="8182"></A> -- you will
need to explicitly use <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="8185"></A> or <TT>\Gls</TT><A NAME="8188"></A> to change the
settings.
<P>
Recall that, in general, LaTeX ignores spaces following command
names consisting of alphabetical characters. This is also true for
<TT>\</TT><I>label</I> unless you additionally load the
<TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="8191"></A> package.
<P>
The <TT>glossaries</TT> package doesn't load the <TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="8195"></A> package
since there are both advantages and disadvantages to using
<TT>\xspace</TT><A NAME="8198"></A> in <TT>\</TT><I>label</I>. If you don't use the
<TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="8201"></A> package you need to explicitly force a space using
<code>\ </code> (backslash space) however you can follow <TT>\</TT><I>label</I>
with additional text in square brackets (the final optional
argument to <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="8204"></A>). If you use the <TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="8207"></A> package
you don't need to escape the spaces but you can't use
the optional argument to insert text (you will have to explicitly
use <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="8210"></A>).
<P>
To illustrate this, suppose I define the acronym "abc" as
follows:
<PRE>
\oldacronym{abc}{example acronym}{}
</PRE>
This will create the command <TT>\abc</TT> and its starred version
<TT>\abc*</TT>. <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:xspace">Table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:xspace">6</A> illustrates the effect of
<TT>\abc</TT> (on subsequent use) according to whether or not the
<TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="8216"></A> package has been loaded. As can be seen from the
final row in the table, the <TT>xspace</TT><A NAME="8219"></A> package prevents the
optional argument from being recognised.
<P>
<BR><P></P>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
<A NAME="tab:xspace"></A>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER"><A NAME="4416"></A>
<TABLE CELLPADDING=3>
<CAPTION><STRONG>Table 6:</STRONG>
The effect of using
<TT>xspace</TT> with <TT>\oldacronym</TT></CAPTION>
<TR><TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Code </B></TH>
<TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>With <TT>xspace</TT> </B></TH>
<TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Without <TT>xspace</TT></B></TH>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><code>\abc.</code></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">abc.</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">abc.</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><code>\abc xyz</code></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">abc xyz</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">abcxyz</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><code>\abc\ xyz</code></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">abc xyz</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">abc xyz</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><code>\abc* xyz</code></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">Abc xyz</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">Abc xyz</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><code>\abc['s] xyz</code></TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">abc ['s] xyz</TD>
<TD ALIGN="LEFT">abc's xyz</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</DIV>
<P>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER"></DIV>
</DIV>
<BR>
<P>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION000311000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:glsunset"></A>
<BR>
Unsetting and Resetting Entry Flags
</H2>
<P>
When using <TT>\gls</TT><A NAME="8228"></A>, <TT>\glspl</TT><A NAME="8231"></A> and their uppercase variants it is
possible that you may want to use the value given by the
<TT>first</TT><A NAME="8234"></A> key, even though you have already used the glossary
entry<A NAME="8236"></A>. Conversely, you may want to use the value given by the
<TT>text</TT><A NAME="8238"></A> key, even though you haven't used the glossary entry.
The former can be achieved by one of the following commands:
<P>
<TT>\glsreset{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glslocalreset{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
while the latter can be achieved by one of the following commands:
<P>
<TT>\glsunset{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glslocalunset{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
You can also reset or unset all entries for a given glossary or list of
glossaries using:
<P>
<TT>\glsresetall[</TT><EM>glossary list</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glslocalresetall[</TT><EM>glossary list</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glsunsetall[</TT><EM>glossary list</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glslocalunsetall[</TT><EM>glossary list</EM><TT>]</TT>
<P>
where <I>glossary list</I> is a comma-separated list of
glossary labels. If omitted, all defined glossaries are assumed.
For example, to reset all entries in the main glossary and the
list of acronyms:
<PRE>
\glsresetall[main,acronym]
</PRE>
<P>
You can determine whether an entry's first use flag is set using:
<P>
<TT>\ifglsused{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>true part</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>false part</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
where <I>label</I> is the label of the required entry. If the
entry has been used, <I>true part</I> will be done, otherwise
<I>false part</I> will be done.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION000312000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:styles"></A>
<BR>
Glossary Styles
</H2>
The <TT>glossaries</TT> package comes with some pre-defined
glossary styles. Note that the styles are suited to different
types of glossaries: some styles ignore the associated
symbol; some styles are not designed for hierarchical entries,
so they display sub-entries in the same way as they display top
level entries; some styles are designed for homographs, so they
ignore the name for sub-entries. You should therefore pick a style
that suits your type of glossary. See <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:styles">table </A><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tab:styles">7</A> for
a summary of the available styles.
<P>
<BR><P></P>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER">
<A NAME="tab:styles"></A>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER"><A NAME="4417"></A>
<TABLE CELLPADDING=3>
<CAPTION><STRONG>Table 7:</STRONG>
Glossary Styles. An asterisk in the style
name indicates anything that matches that doesn't match any
previously listed style (e.g. <TT>long3col*</TT>
matches <TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="8248"></A>, <TT>long3colheader</TT><A NAME="8250"></A>,
<TT>long3colborder</TT><A NAME="8252"></A> and <TT>long3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8254"></A>).
A maximum level of 0 indicates a flat glossary (sub-entries
are displayed in the same way as main entries). Where the maximum
level is given as -- there is no limit, but note that
<TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="8256"></A> imposes a limit of 2 sub-levels. If the
homograph column is checked, then the name is not displayed for
sub-entries. If the symbol column is checked, then the symbol will
be displayed if it has been defined.</CAPTION>
<TR><TH ALIGN="LEFT"><B>Style </B></TH>
<TH ALIGN="CENTER"><B>Maximum Level </B></TH>
<TH ALIGN="CENTER"><B>Homograph </B></TH>
<TH ALIGN="CENTER"><B>Symbol</B></TH>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>listdotted </TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">0</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER"> </TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER"> </TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>sublistdotted </TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER"> </TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER"> </TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>list* </TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER"> </TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>altlist* </TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER"> </TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>long*3col* </TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER"> </TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>long4col* </TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>altlong*4col* </TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>long* </TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER"> </TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>super*3col* </TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER"> </TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>super4col* </TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>altsuper*4col* </TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>super* </TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">1</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER"> </TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>index* </TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">2</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER"> </TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>treenoname* </TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">--</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>tree* </TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">--</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER"> </TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD ALIGN="LEFT"><TT>alttree* </TT></TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">--</TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER"> </TD>
<TD ALIGN="CENTER">X</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</DIV>
<P>
<DIV ALIGN="CENTER"></DIV>
</DIV>
<BR>
<P>
The glossary style can be set using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="8259"></A> key in the optional
argument to <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="8262"></A> or using the command:
<P>
<TT>\glossarystyle{</TT><EM>style-name</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
Some of the glossary styles may also be set using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="8270"></A>
package option, it depends if the package in which they are defined
is automatically loaded by the <TT>glossaries</TT> package.
<P>
The tabular-like styles that allow multi-line descriptions and page
lists use the length <TT>\glsdescwidth</TT>
to set the width of the description column and the length
<TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT> to set the
width of the page list column.<A NAME="tex2html37"
HREF="#foot4418"><SUP>13</SUP></A>These will need to be changed using <TT>\setlength</TT> if the glossary
is too wide. Note that the <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="8302"></A> and
<TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="8304"></A> styles (and their header and border variations)
don't use these lengths as they are designed for single line
entries. Instead you should use the analogous <TT>altlong4col</TT><A NAME="8306"></A>
and <TT>altsuper4col</TT><A NAME="8308"></A> styles. If you want to
explicitly create a line-break within a multi-line description in
a tabular-like style you should use <TT>\newline</TT><A NAME="8310"></A> instead of
<code>\\</code>.
<P>
Note that if you use the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="8313"></A> key in the
optional argument to <TT>\printglossary</TT><A NAME="8316"></A>, it will override any
previous style settings for the given glossary, so if, for example,
you do
<PRE>
\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}
\printglossary[style=long]
</PRE>
then the new definition of <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT><A NAME="8319"></A> will not have an affect
for this glossary, as <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> is redefined by
<code>style=long</code>. Likewise, <TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="8322"></A> will also
override any previous style definitions, so, again
<PRE>
\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}
\glossarystyle{long}
</PRE>
will reset <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> back to its default definition for the
named glossary style (<TT>long</TT><A NAME="8325"></A> in this case). If you want to
modify the styles, either use <TT>\newglossarystyle</TT><A NAME="8327"></A> (described
in the next section) or make the modifications after
<TT>\glossarystyle</TT><A NAME="8330"></A>, e.g.:
<PRE>
\glossarystyle{long}
\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}
</PRE>
<P>
All the styles except for the three- and four-column styles and the
<TT>listdotted</TT><A NAME="8333"></A> style use the command
<TT>\glspostdescription</TT> after the
description. This simply displays a full stop by default. To eliminate
this full stop (or replace it with something else, say, a comma) you
will need to redefine <TT>\glspostdescription</TT> before the glossary is
displayed. Alternatively, you can suppress it for a given entry
by placing <TT>\nopostdesc</TT><A NAME="8335"></A> in the entry's description.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION000312100000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:liststyles"></A>
<BR>
List Styles
</H3>
<P>
The styles described in this section are all defined in the package
<TT>glossary-list</TT><A NAME="8341"></A>. Since they all use the <TT>description</TT>
environment, they are governed by the same parameters as that
environment. These styles all ignore the entry's symbol. Note that
these styles will automatically be available unless you use the
<TT>nolist</TT><A NAME="8350"></A> or <TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="8359"></A> package options.
<P>
<DL>
<DT><STRONG>list</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="8363"></A> style uses the <TT>description</TT>
environment. The entry name is placed in the optional argument of
the <TT>\item</TT> command (so it will appear in bold by default). The
description follows, and then the associated number list<A NAME="8365"></A> for
that entry. The symbol is ignored. If the entry has child entries,
the description and number list follows (but not the name) for each
child entry. Groups are separated using <TT>\indexspace</TT>.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>listgroup</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>listgroup</TT><A NAME="8367"></A> style is like
<TT>list</TT><A NAME="8369"></A> but the glossary groups have headings.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>listhypergroup</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8371"></A> style is like
<TT>listgroup</TT><A NAME="8373"></A> but has a navigation line at the start of
the glossary with links to each group that is present in the
glossary. This requires an additional run through LaTeX to ensure
the group information is up to date. In the navigation line, each
group is separated
by <TT>\glshypernavsep</TT> which
defaults to a vertical bar with a space on either side. For example,
to simply have a space separating each group, do:
<PRE>
\renewcommand*{\glshypernavsep}{\space}
</PRE>
<P>
Note that the hyper-navigation line is now (as from version 1.14)
set inside the optional argument to <TT>\item</TT> instead of after it
to prevent a spurious space at the start. This can be changed
by redefining <TT>\glossaryheader</TT><A NAME="8375"></A>, but note that this needs to
be done <I>after</I> the glossary style has been set.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altlist</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>altlist</TT><A NAME="8378"></A> style is like <TT>list</TT><A NAME="8380"></A>
but the description starts on the line following the name. (As
with the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="8382"></A> style, the symbol is ignored.) Each child
entry starts a new line, but as with the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="8384"></A> style,
the name associated with each child entry is ignored.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altlistgroup</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>altlistgroup</TT><A NAME="8386"></A> style is like
<TT>altlist</TT><A NAME="8388"></A> but the glossary groups have headings.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altlisthypergroup</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>altlisthypergroup</TT><A NAME="8390"></A> style is like
<TT>altlistgroup</TT><A NAME="8392"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary
groups. The navigation line is the same as that for
<TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8394"></A>, described above.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>listdotted</STRONG></DT>
<DD>This style uses the <TT>description</TT>
environment.<A NAME="tex2html38"
HREF="#foot3576"><SUP>14</SUP></A> Each
entry starts with <code>\item[]</code>, followed by the name followed by a
dotted line, followed by the description. Note that this style
ignores both the number list<A NAME="8396"></A> and the symbol. The length
<TT>\glslistdottedwidth</TT> governs
where the description should start. This is a flat style, so child
entries are formatted in the same way as the parent entries.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>sublistdotted</STRONG></DT>
<DD>This is a variation on the <TT>listdotted</TT><A NAME="8398"></A>
style designed for hierarchical glossaries. The main entries
have just the name displayed. The sub entries are displayed in
the same manner as <TT>listdotted</TT><A NAME="8400"></A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION000312200000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:longstyles"></A>
<BR>
Longtable Styles
</H3>
<P>
The styles described in this section are all defined in the package
<TT>glossary-long</TT><A NAME="8405"></A>. Since they all use the <TT>longtable</TT>
environment, they are governed by the same parameters as that
environment. Note that these styles will automatically be available
unless you use the <TT>nolong</TT><A NAME="8414"></A> or <TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="8423"></A> package
options. These styles fully justify the description and page list
columns. If you want ragged right formatting instead, use the
analogous styles described in
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:longraggedstyles">Longtable Styles
(Ragged Right)</A>.
<P>
<DL>
<DT><STRONG>long</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>long</TT><A NAME="8427"></A> style uses the <TT>longtable</TT>
environment (defined by the <TT>longtable</TT><A NAME="8430"></A> package). It has two
columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second
column contains the description followed by the number list<A NAME="8432"></A>.
The entry's symbol is ignored.
Sub groups are separated with a blank row. The width of the
first column is governed by the widest entry in that column. The
width of the second column is governed by the length
<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="8434"></A>. Child entries have a similar format to the
parent entries except that their name is suppressed.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>longborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>longborder</TT><A NAME="8437"></A> style is like
<TT>long</TT><A NAME="8439"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>longheader</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="8441"></A> style is like
<TT>long</TT><A NAME="8443"></A> but has a header row.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>longheaderborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>longheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8445"></A> style is
like <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="8447"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines
around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>long3col</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="8449"></A> style is like
<TT>long</TT><A NAME="8451"></A> but has three columns. The first column contains
the entry's name, the second column contains the description
and the third column contains the number list<A NAME="8452"></A>.
The entry's symbol is ignored. The width of the
first column is governed by the widest entry in that column, the
width of the second column is governed by the length
<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="8454"></A>, and the width of the third column is governed by the
length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="8457"></A>.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>long3colborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>long3colborder</TT><A NAME="8460"></A> style is like
the <TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="8462"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>long3colheader</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>long3colheader</TT><A NAME="8464"></A> style is like
<TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="8466"></A> but has a header row.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>long3colheaderborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>long3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8468"></A> style is
like <TT>long3colheader</TT><A NAME="8470"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines
around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>long4col</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="8472"></A> style is like
<TT>long3col</TT><A NAME="8474"></A> but has an additional column in which the
entry's associated symbol appears. This style is used for brief
single line descriptions. The column widths are governed by the
widest entry in the given column. Use <TT>altlong4col</TT><A NAME="8476"></A> for
multi-line descriptions.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>long4colborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>long4colborder</TT><A NAME="8478"></A> style is like
the <TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="8480"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>long4colheader</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="8482"></A> style is like
<TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="8484"></A> but has a header row.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>long4colheaderborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>long4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8486"></A> style is
like <TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="8488"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines
around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altlong4col</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>altlong4col</TT><A NAME="8490"></A> style is like
<TT>long4col</TT><A NAME="8492"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and page
lists. The width of the description column is governed by the
length <TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="8494"></A> and the width of the page list column is
governed by the length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="8497"></A>. The widths of the
name and symbol columns are governed by the widest entry in the
given column.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altlong4colborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>altlong4colborder</TT><A NAME="8500"></A> style is like
the <TT>long4colborder</TT><A NAME="8502"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and
page lists.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altlong4colheader</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>altlong4colheader</TT><A NAME="8504"></A> style is like
<TT>long4colheader</TT><A NAME="8506"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and
page lists.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altlong4colheaderborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>altlong4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8508"></A>
style is like <TT>long4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8510"></A> but allows multi-line
descriptions and page lists.
</DD>
</DL>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION000312300000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:longraggedstyles"></A>
<BR>
Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)
</H3>
<P>
The styles described in this section are all defined in the package
<TT>glossary-longragged</TT><A NAME="8515"></A>. These styles are analogous to those
defined in <TT>glossary-long</TT><A NAME="8518"></A> but the multiline columns are left
justified instead of fully justified. Since these styles all use the
<TT>longtable</TT> environment, they are governed by the same
parameters as that environment. The <TT>glossary-longragged</TT><A NAME="8522"></A>
package additionally requires the <TT>array</TT><A NAME="8525"></A> package. Note that
these styles will only be available if you explicitly load
<TT>glossary-longragged</TT><A NAME="8528"></A>:
<PRE>
\usepackage{glossaries}
\usepackage{glossary-longragged}
</PRE>
Note that you can't set these styles using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="8536"></A>
package option since the styles aren't defined until after
the <TT>glossaries</TT> package has been loaded.
<P>
<DL>
<DT><STRONG>longragged</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>longragged</TT><A NAME="8541"></A> style has two
columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second
column contains the (left-justified) description followed by the
number list<A NAME="8542"></A>. The entry's symbol is ignored.
Sub groups are separated with a blank row. The width of the
first column is governed by the widest entry in that column. The
width of the second column is governed by the length
<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="8544"></A>. Child entries have a similar format to the
parent entries except that their name is suppressed.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>longraggedborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>longraggedborder</TT><A NAME="8547"></A> style is like
<TT>longragged</TT><A NAME="8549"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>longraggedheader</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>longraggedheader</TT><A NAME="8551"></A> style is like
<TT>longragged</TT><A NAME="8553"></A> but has a header row.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>longraggedheaderborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>longraggedheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8555"></A>
style is like <TT>longraggedheader</TT><A NAME="8557"></A> but has horizontal and
vertical lines around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>longragged3col</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>longragged3col</TT><A NAME="8559"></A> style is like
<TT>longragged</TT><A NAME="8561"></A> but has three columns. The first column
contains the entry's name, the second column contains the (left
justified) description and the third column contains the (left
justified) number list<A NAME="8562"></A>. The entry's symbol is ignored. The
width of the first column is governed by the widest entry in that
column, the width of the second column is governed by the length
<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="8564"></A>, and the width of the third column is governed by
the length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="8567"></A>.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>longragged3colborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>longragged3colborder</TT><A NAME="8570"></A>
style is like the <TT>longragged3col</TT><A NAME="8572"></A> style but has horizontal
and vertical lines around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>longragged3colheader</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>longragged3colheader</TT><A NAME="8574"></A> style is like
<TT>longragged3col</TT><A NAME="8576"></A> but has a header row.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>longragged3colheaderborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>longragged3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8578"></A> style is
like <TT>longragged3colheader</TT><A NAME="8580"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines
around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altlongragged4col</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>altlongragged4col</TT><A NAME="8582"></A> style is
like <TT>longragged3col</TT><A NAME="8584"></A> but has an additional column in which
the entry's associated symbol appears. The width of the description
column is governed by the length <TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="8586"></A> and the width of
the page list column is governed by the length
<TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="8589"></A>. The widths of the name and symbol columns
are governed by the widest entry in the given column.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altlongragged4colborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The
<TT>altlongragged4colborder</TT><A NAME="8592"></A> style is like the
<TT>altlongragged4col</TT><A NAME="8594"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines
around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altlongragged4colheader</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The
<TT>altlongragged4colheader</TT><A NAME="8596"></A> style is like
<TT>altlongragged4col</TT><A NAME="8598"></A> but has a header row.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altlongragged4colheaderborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The
<TT>altlongragged4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8600"></A> style is like
<TT>altlongragged4colheader</TT><A NAME="8602"></A> but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.
<P>
</DD>
</DL>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION000312400000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:superstyles"></A>
<BR>
Supertabular Styles
</H3>
<P>
The styles described in this section are all defined in the package
<TT>glossary-super</TT><A NAME="8607"></A>. Since they all use the <TT>supertabular</TT>
environment, they are governed by the same parameters as that
environment. Note that these styles will automatically be available
unless you use the <TT>nosuper</TT><A NAME="8616"></A> or <TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="8625"></A> package
options. In general, the <TT>longtable</TT> environment is better,
but there are some circumstances where it is better to use
<TT>supertabular</TT>.<A NAME="tex2html39"
HREF="#foot4421"><SUP>15</SUP></A> These styles fully justify the description and page list
columns. If you want ragged right formatting instead, use the
analogous styles described in
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:superraggedstyles">Supertabular
Styles (Ragged Right)</A>.
<P>
<DL>
<DT><STRONG>super</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>super</TT><A NAME="8634"></A> style uses the <TT>supertabular</TT>
environment (defined by the <TT>supertabular</TT><A NAME="8637"></A> package). It has two
columns: the first column contains the entry's name and the second
column contains the description followed by the number list<A NAME="8639"></A>.
The entry's symbol is ignored.
Sub groups are separated with a blank row. The width of the
first column is governed by the widest entry in that column. The
width of the second column is governed by the length
<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="8641"></A>. Child entries have a similar format to the
parent entries except that their name is suppressed.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>superborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>superborder</TT><A NAME="8644"></A> style is like
<TT>super</TT><A NAME="8646"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>superheader</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>superheader</TT><A NAME="8648"></A> style is like
<TT>super</TT><A NAME="8650"></A> but has a header row.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>superheaderborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>superheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8652"></A> style is
like <TT>superheader</TT><A NAME="8654"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines
around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>super3col</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="8656"></A> style is like
<TT>super</TT><A NAME="8658"></A> but has three columns. The first column contains
the entry's name, the second column contains the description
and the third column contains the number list<A NAME="8659"></A>. The
entry's symbol is ignored. The width of the
first column is governed by the widest entry in that column. The
width of the second column is governed by the length
<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="8661"></A>. The width of the third column is governed by the
length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="8664"></A>.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>super3colborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>super3colborder</TT><A NAME="8667"></A> style is like
the <TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="8669"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>super3colheader</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>super3colheader</TT><A NAME="8671"></A> style is like
<TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="8673"></A> but has a header row.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>super3colheaderborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>super3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8675"></A> style
is like <TT>super3colheader</TT><A NAME="8677"></A> but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>super4col</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="8679"></A> style is like
<TT>super3col</TT><A NAME="8681"></A> but has an additional column in which the
entry's associated symbol appears. This style is designed for
entries with brief single line descriptions. The column widths are governed by the
widest entry in the given column. Use <TT>altsuper4col</TT><A NAME="8683"></A>
for multi-line descriptions.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>super4colborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>super4colborder</TT><A NAME="8685"></A> style is like
the <TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="8687"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>super4colheader</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="8689"></A> style is like
<TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="8691"></A> but has a header row.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>super4colheaderborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>super4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8693"></A> style
is like <TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="8695"></A> but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altsuper4col</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>altsuper4col</TT><A NAME="8697"></A> style is like
<TT>super4col</TT><A NAME="8699"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and page
lists.
The width of the description column is governed by the length
<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="8701"></A> and the width of the page list column is
governed by the length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="8704"></A>. The width of the name
and symbol columns is governed by the widest entry in the
given column.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altsuper4colborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>altsuper4colborder</TT><A NAME="8707"></A> style is like
the <TT>super4colborder</TT><A NAME="8709"></A> style but allows multi-line descriptions
and page lists.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altsuper4colheader</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>altsuper4colheader</TT><A NAME="8711"></A> style is like
<TT>super4colheader</TT><A NAME="8713"></A> but allows multi-line descriptions and
page lists.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altsuper4colheaderborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>altsuper4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8715"></A>
style is like <TT>super4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8717"></A> but allows multi-line
descriptions and page lists.
</DD>
</DL>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION000312500000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:superraggedstyles"></A>
<BR>
Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)
</H3>
<P>
The styles described in this section are all defined in the package
<TT>glossary-superragged</TT><A NAME="8722"></A>. These styles are analogous to those
defined in <TT>glossary-super</TT><A NAME="8725"></A> but the multiline columns are left
justified instead of fully justified. Since these styles all use the
<TT>supertabular</TT> environment, they are governed by the same
parameters as that environment. The <TT>glossary-superragged</TT><A NAME="8729"></A>
package additionally requires the <TT>array</TT><A NAME="8732"></A> package. Note that
these styles will only be available if you explicitly load
<TT>glossary-superragged</TT><A NAME="8735"></A>:
<PRE>
\usepackage{glossaries}
\usepackage{glossary-superragged}
</PRE>
Note that you can't set these styles using the <TT>style</TT><A NAME="8743"></A>
package option since the styles aren't defined until after
the <TT>glossaries</TT> package has been loaded.
<P>
<DL>
<DT><STRONG>superragged</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>superragged</TT><A NAME="8748"></A> style uses the
<TT>supertabular</TT> environment (defined by the
<TT>supertabular</TT><A NAME="8751"></A> package). It has two columns: the first column
contains the entry's name and the second column contains the (left
justified) description followed by the number list<A NAME="8753"></A>. The
entry's symbol is ignored. Sub groups are separated with a blank
row. The width of the first column is governed by the widest entry
in that column. The width of the second column is governed by the
length <TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="8755"></A>. Child entries have a similar format to
the parent entries except that their name is suppressed.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>superraggedborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>superraggedborder</TT><A NAME="8758"></A> style is
like <TT>superragged</TT><A NAME="8760"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines
around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>superraggedheader</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>superraggedheader</TT><A NAME="8762"></A> style is
like <TT>superragged</TT><A NAME="8764"></A> but has a header row.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>superraggedheaderborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The
<TT>superraggedheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8766"></A> style is like
<TT>superraggedheader</TT><A NAME="8768"></A> but has horizontal and vertical lines
around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>superragged3col</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>superragged3col</TT><A NAME="8770"></A> style is like
<TT>superragged</TT><A NAME="8772"></A> but has three columns. The first column
contains the entry's name, the second column contains the (left
justified) description and the third column contains the (left
justified) number list<A NAME="8773"></A>. The entry's symbol is ignored. The
width of the first column is governed by the widest entry in that
column. The width of the second column is governed by the length
<TT>\glsdescwidth</TT><A NAME="8775"></A>. The width of the third column is governed by the
length <TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT><A NAME="8778"></A>.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>superragged3colborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>superragged3colborder</TT><A NAME="8781"></A>
style is like the <TT>superragged3col</TT><A NAME="8783"></A> style but has
horizontal and vertical lines around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>superragged3colheader</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>superragged3colheader</TT><A NAME="8785"></A>
style is like <TT>superragged3col</TT><A NAME="8787"></A> but has a header row.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>superragged3colheaderborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The
<TT>superragged3colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8789"></A> style is like
<TT>superragged3colheader</TT><A NAME="8791"></A> but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4col</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>altsuperragged4col</TT><A NAME="8793"></A> style is
like <TT>superragged3col</TT><A NAME="8795"></A> but has an additional column in
which the entry's associated symbol appears. The column widths for
the name and symbol column are governed by the widest entry in the
given column.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4colborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The
<TT>altsuperragged4colborder</TT><A NAME="8797"></A> style is like the
<TT>altsuperragged4col</TT><A NAME="8799"></A> style but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4colheader</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The
<TT>altsuperragged4colheader</TT><A NAME="8801"></A> style is like
<TT>altsuperragged4col</TT><A NAME="8803"></A> but has a header row.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4colheaderborder</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The
<TT>altsuperragged4colheaderborder</TT><A NAME="8805"></A> style is like
<TT>altsuperragged4colheader</TT><A NAME="8807"></A> but has horizontal and vertical
lines around it.
<P>
</DD>
</DL>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION000312600000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:treestyles"></A>
<BR>
Tree-Like Styles
</H3>
<P>
The styles described in this section are all defined in the package
<TT>glossary-tree</TT><A NAME="8812"></A>. These styles are designed for hierarchical
glossaries but can also be used with glossaries that don't have
sub-entries. These styles will display the entry's symbol if it
exists. Note that these styles will automatically be available
unless you use the <TT>notree</TT><A NAME="8820"></A> or <TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="8829"></A> package
options.
<P>
<DL>
<DT><STRONG>index</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>index</TT><A NAME="8833"></A> style is similar to the way
indices are usually formatted in that it has a hierarchical
structure up to three levels (the main level plus two sub-levels).
The name is typeset in bold, and if the symbol is present it is set
in parentheses after the name and before the description.
Sub-entries are indented and also include the name, the symbol
in brackets (if present) and the description. Groups are separated
using <TT>\indexspace</TT><A NAME="8835"></A>.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>indexgroup</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>indexgroup</TT><A NAME="8838"></A> style is similar to
the <TT>index</TT><A NAME="8840"></A> style except that each group has a heading.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>indexhypergroup</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>indexhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8842"></A> style is like
<TT>indexgroup</TT><A NAME="8844"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary
groups. The navigation line is the same as that for
<TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8846"></A>, described above.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>tree</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>tree</TT><A NAME="8848"></A> style is similar to the
<TT>index</TT><A NAME="8850"></A> style except that it can have arbitrary levels.
(Note that <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="8852"></A> is limited to three levels, so
you will need to use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="8855"></A> if you want more than
three levels.) Each sub-level is indented by
<TT>\glstreeindent</TT>. Note that the
name, symbol (if present) and description are placed in the
same paragraph block. If you want the name to be apart from the
description, use the <TT>alttree</TT><A NAME="8858"></A> style instead. (See below.)
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>treegroup</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>treegroup</TT><A NAME="8860"></A> style is similar to
the <TT>tree</TT><A NAME="8862"></A> style except that each group has a heading.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>treehypergroup</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>treehypergroup</TT><A NAME="8864"></A> style is like
<TT>treegroup</TT><A NAME="8866"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary
groups. The navigation line is the same as that for
<TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8868"></A>, described above.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>treenoname</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>treenoname</TT><A NAME="8870"></A> style is like
the <TT>tree</TT><A NAME="8872"></A> style except that the name for each sub-entry
is ignored.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>treenonamegroup</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>treenonamegroup</TT><A NAME="8874"></A> style is
similar to the <TT>treenoname</TT><A NAME="8876"></A> style except that each group
has a heading.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>treenonamehypergroup</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>treenonamehypergroup</TT><A NAME="8878"></A>
style is like <TT>treenonamegroup</TT><A NAME="8880"></A> but has a set of links to
the glossary groups. The navigation line is the same as that for
<TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8882"></A>, described above.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>alttree</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>alttree</TT><A NAME="8884"></A> style is similar to the
<TT>tree</TT><A NAME="8886"></A> style except that the indentation for each level
is determined by the width of the text specified by
<P>
<TT>\glssetwidest[</TT><EM>level</EM><TT>]{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
The optional argument <I>level</I> indicates the level, where
0 indicates the top-most level, 1 indicates the first level
sub-entries, etc. If <TT>\glssetwidest</TT> hasn't been used for a
given sub-level, the level 0 widest text is used instead. If
<I>level</I> is omitted, 0 is assumed.
<P>
For each level, the name is placed to the left of the paragraph
block containing the symbol (optional) and the description. If the
symbol is present, it is placed in parentheses before the
description.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>alttreegroup</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>alttreegroup</TT><A NAME="8888"></A> is like the
<TT>alttree</TT><A NAME="8890"></A> style except that each group has a heading.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG>alttreehypergroup</STRONG></DT>
<DD>The <TT>alttreehypergroup</TT><A NAME="8892"></A> style is
like <TT>alttreegroup</TT><A NAME="8894"></A> but has a set of links to the glossary
groups. The navigation line is the same as that for
<TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8896"></A>, described above.
<P>
</DD>
</DL>
<P>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION000313000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:newglossarystyle"></A>
<BR>
Defining your own glossary style
</H2>
<P>
If the predefined styles don't fit your requirements, you can
define your own style using:
<P>
<TT>\newglossarystyle{</TT><EM>name</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>definitions</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
where <I>name</I> is the name of the new glossary style (to be
used in <TT>\glossarystyle</TT>). The second argument <I>definitions</I>
needs to redefine all of the following:
<P>
<P>
<TT>theglossary</TT>
<P>
This environment defines how the main body of the glossary should
be typeset. Note that this does not include the section heading,
the glossary preamble (defined by <TT>\glossarypreamble</TT>) or the
glossary postamble (defined by <TT>\glossarypostamble</TT>). For example,
the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="8902"></A> style uses the <TT>description</TT> environment,
so the <TT>theglossary</TT> environment is simply redefined to begin
and end the <TT>description</TT> environment.
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glossaryheader</TT>
<P>
This macro indicates what to do at the start of the main body
of the glossary. Note that this is not the same as
<TT>\glossarypreamble</TT>, which should not be affected by changes in
the glossary style. The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="8907"></A> glossary style redefines
<TT>\glossaryheader</TT> to do nothing, whereas the <TT>longheader</TT><A NAME="8909"></A>
glossary style redefines <TT>\glossaryheader</TT> to do a header row.
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glsgroupheading{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
This macro indicates
what to do at the start of each logical block within the main body
of the glossary. If you use <TT>makeindex</TT><A NAME="8911"></A> the glossary is
sub-divided into a maximum of twenty-eight logical blocks that are
determined by the first character of the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="8914"></A> key (or
<TT>name</TT><A NAME="8917"></A> key if the <TT>sort</TT><A NAME="8920"></A> key is omitted). The
sub-divisions are in the following order: symbols, numbers, A,
..., Z. If you use <TT>xindy</TT><A NAME="8923"></A>, the sub-divisions depend on
the language settings.
<P>
Note that the argument to <TT>\glsgroupheading</TT>
is a label <I>not</I> the group title. The group title can be obtained
via
<P>
<TT>\glsgetgrouptitle{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
This obtains the title as follows: if
<TT>\</TT><I>label</I><TT>groupname</TT> exists, this is taken to be the
title, otherwise the title is just <I>label</I>.
<P>
A navigation hypertarget can be created using
<P>
<TT>\glsnavhypertarget{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
For further details about <TT>\glsnavhypertarget</TT>, see
the documented code of <TT>glossary-hypernav</TT><A NAME="8926"></A>
in <TT>glossaries.pdf</TT>.
<P>
Most of the predefined glossary styles redefine <TT>\glsgroupheading</TT>
to simply ignore its argument. The <TT>listhypergroup</TT><A NAME="8929"></A> style
redefines <TT>\glsgroupheading</TT> as follows:
<PRE>
\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{%
\item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]}
</PRE>
See also <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> below. (Note that command definitions within
<TT>\newglossarystyle</TT> must use <code>##1</code> instead of <code>#1</code> etc.)
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glsgroupskip</TT>
<P>
This macro determines what to do after one logical group but before
the header for the next logical group. The <TT>list</TT><A NAME="8931"></A> glossary
style simply redefines <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> to be <TT>\indexspace</TT>,
whereas the tabular-like styles redefine <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT> to
produce a blank row.
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glossaryentryfield{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>formatted
name</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>description</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>symbol</EM><TT>}</TT>
<TT>{</TT><EM>number list</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
This macro indicates what to do for a given glossary entry.
Note that <I>formatted name</I> will always be in the form
<TT>\glsnamefont{</TT><EM>name</EM><TT>}</TT>. This allows the user to set a given
font for the entry name, regardless of the glossary style used.
Note that <I>label</I> is the label used when the glossary entry
was defined via either <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> or <TT>\newacronym</TT>.
<P>
Each time you use a glossary entry it creates a hyperlink (if
hyperlinks are enabled) to the relevant line in the glossary.
Your new glossary style must therefore redefine
<TT>\glossaryentryfield</TT> to set the appropriate target. This
is done using
<P>
<TT>\glstarget{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>text</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
where <I>label</I> is the entry's label. Note that you
don't need to worry about whether the <TT>hyperref</TT><A NAME="8933"></A> package has
been loaded, as <TT>\glstarget</TT> won't create a target if
<TT>\hypertarget</TT> hasn't been defined.
<P>
For example, the
<TT>list</TT><A NAME="8936"></A> style defines <TT>\glossaryentryfield</TT> as follows:
<PRE>
\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
\item[\glstarget{##1}{##2}] ##3\glspostdescription\space ##5}
</PRE>
<P>
Note also that <I>number list</I> will always be of the form
<BR>
<BR><TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT>{<TT>\relax</TT>
<BR><TT>\setentrycounter{</TT><EM>counter name</EM><TT>}\glsnumberformat{</TT><EM>number(s)</EM><TT>}</TT>}
<BR>
<BR>
where <I>number(s)</I>
may contain <TT>\delimN</TT> (to delimit individual numbers) and/or
<TT>\delimR</TT> (to indicate a range of numbers). There may be
multiple occurrences of
<TT>\setentrycounter{</TT><EM>counter name</EM><TT>}\glsnumberformat{</TT><EM>number(s)</EM><TT>}</TT>, but note
that the entire number list is enclosed within the argument
to <TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT><A NAME="8938"></A>. The user can redefine this to change
the way the entire number list is formatted, regardless of
the glossary style. However the most common use of
<TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT> is to provide a means of suppressing the
number list altogether. (In fact, the <TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="8946"></A> option
redefines <TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT> to ignore its argument.)
Therefore, when you define a new glossary style, you don't need
to worry about whether the user has specified the
<TT>nonumberlist</TT><A NAME="8955"></A> package option.
<P>
<P>
<TT>\glossarysubentryfield{</TT><EM>level</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>label</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>formatted
name</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>description</EM><TT>}{</TT><EM>symbol</EM><TT>}</TT>
<TT>{</TT><EM>number list</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
This is new to version 1.17, and is used to display sub-entries.
The first argument, <I>level</I>, indicates the sub-entry level.
This must be an integer from 1 (first sub-level) onwards. The
remaining arguments are analogous to those for
<TT>\glossaryentryfield</TT><A NAME="8959"></A> described above.
<P>
For further details of these commands, see
the documented code in <TT>glossaries.pdf</TT>.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION000313100000000000000">
Example: creating a completely new style</A>
</H3>
<P>
If you want a completely new style, you will need to redefine all
of the commands and the environment listed above.
<P>
For example, suppose you want each entry to start with a bullet point.
This means that the glossary should be placed in the <TT>itemize</TT>
environment, so <TT>theglossary</TT> should start and end that
environment. Let's also suppose that you don't want anything between
the glossary groups (so <TT>\glsgroupheading</TT><A NAME="8967"></A> and <TT>\glsgroupskip</TT><A NAME="8970"></A>
should do nothing) and suppose you don't want anything to appear
immediately after <code>\begin{theglossary}</code> (so <TT>\glossaryheader</TT><A NAME="8973"></A>
should do nothing). In addition, let's suppose the symbol should
appear in brackets after the name, followed by the description and
last of all the number list<A NAME="8975"></A> should appear within square brackets
at the end. Then you can create this new glossary style, called, say,
<TT>mylist</TT>, as follows:
<PRE>
\newglossarystyle{mylist}{%
% put the glossary in the itemize environment:
\renewenvironment{theglossary}{\begin{itemize}}{\end{itemize}}%
% have nothing after \begin{theglossary}:
\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
% have nothing between glossary groups:
\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}%
% set how each entry should appear:
\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
\item % bullet point
\glstarget{##1}{##2}% the entry name
\space (##4)% the symbol in brackets
\space ##3% the description
\space [##5]% the number list in square brackets
}%
% set how sub-entries appear:
\renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
\glossaryentryfield{##2}{##3}{##4}{##5}{##6}}%
}
</PRE>
Note that this style creates a flat glossary, where sub-entries
are displayed in exactly the same way as the top level entries.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION000313200000000000000">
Example: creating a new glossary style based on an
existing style</A>
</H3>
<P>
If you want to define a new style that is a slightly modified
version of an existing style, you can use <TT>\glossarystyle</TT>
within the second argument of <TT>\newglossarystyle</TT> followed by
whatever alterations you require. For example, suppose you want
a style like the <TT>list</TT><A NAME="8980"></A> style but you don't want the extra
vertical space created by <TT>\indexspace</TT> between groups, then you
can create a new glossary style called, say, <TT>mylist</TT> as
follows:
<PRE>
\newglossarystyle{mylist}{%
\glossarystyle{list}% base this style on the list style
\renewcommand{\glsgroupskip}{}% make nothing happen between groups
}
</PRE>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H3><A NAME="SECTION000313300000000000000"></A><A NAME="8985"></A><A NAME="8988"></A>
<BR>
Example: creating a glossary style that uses the
<TT>user1</TT>, ..., <TT>user6</TT> keys
</H3>
<P>
Since <TT>\glossaryentryfield</TT><A NAME="8991"></A> and <TT>\glossarysubentryfield</TT><A NAME="8994"></A>
provide the label for the entry, it's also possible to access
the values of the generic user keys, such as <TT>user1</TT><A NAME="8997"></A>. For
example, suppose each entry not only has an associated symbol,
but also units (stored in <TT>user1</TT><A NAME="9000"></A>) and dimension
(stored in <TT>user2</TT><A NAME="9003"></A>). Then you can define a glossary style
that displays each entry in a <TT>longtable</TT> as follows:
<PRE>
\newglossarystyle{long6col}{%
% put the glossary in a longtable environment:
\renewenvironment{theglossary}%
{\begin{longtable}{lp{\glsdescwidth}cccp{\glspagelistwidth}}}%
{\end{longtable}}%
% Set the table's header:
\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
\bfseries Term & \bfseries Description & \bfseries Symbol &
\bfseries Units & \bfseries Dimensions & \bfseries Page List
\\\endhead}%
% No heading between groups:
\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
% Main (level 0) entries displayed in a row:
\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
\glstarget{##1}{##2}% Name
& ##3% Description
& ##4% Symbol
& \glsentryuseri{##1}% Units
& \glsentryuserii{##1}% Dimensions
& ##5% Page list
\\% end of row
}%
% Sub entries treated the same as level 0 entries:
\renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
\glossaryentryfield{##2}{##3}{##4}{##5}{##6}}%
% Nothing between groups:
\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}%
}
</PRE>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION000314000000000000000"></A><A NAME="sec:accsupp"></A>
<BR>
Accessibility Support
</H2>
Limited accessibility support is provided by the accompanying
<TT>glossaries-accsupp</TT><A NAME="9010"></A> package, but note that this package is
experimental and it requires the <TT>accsupp</TT><A NAME="9013"></A> package
which is also listed as experimental. This package defines
additional keys that may be used when defining glossary entries.
The keys are as follows:
<DL>
<DT><STRONG><TT>access</TT><A NAME="9016"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>The replacement text corresponding to
the <TT>name</TT><A NAME="9019"></A> key.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>textaccess</TT><A NAME="9022"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>The replacement text corresponding
to the <TT>text</TT><A NAME="9025"></A> key.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>firstaccess</TT><A NAME="9028"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>The replacement text corresponding
to the <TT>first</TT><A NAME="9031"></A> key.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>pluralaccess</TT><A NAME="9034"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>The replacement text corresponding
to the <TT>plural</TT><A NAME="9037"></A> key.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>firstpluralaccess</TT><A NAME="9040"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>The replacement text corresponding
to the <TT>firstplural</TT><A NAME="9043"></A> key.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>symbolaccess</TT><A NAME="9046"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>The replacement text corresponding
to the <TT>symbol</TT><A NAME="9049"></A> key.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>symbolpluralaccess</TT><A NAME="9052"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>The replacement text corresponding
to the <TT>symbolplural</TT><A NAME="9055"></A> key.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>descriptionaccess</TT><A NAME="9058"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>The replacement text corresponding
to the <TT>description</TT><A NAME="9061"></A> key.
<P>
</DD>
<DT><STRONG><TT>descriptionpluralaccess</TT><A NAME="9064"></A></STRONG></DT>
<DD>The replacement text corresponding
to the <TT>descriptionplural</TT><A NAME="9067"></A> key.
<P>
</DD>
</DL>
<P>
For example:
<PRE>
\newglossaryentry{tex}{name={\TeX},description={Document preparation
language},access={TeX}}
</PRE>
Now <code>\gls{tex}</code> will be equivalent to
<PRE>
\BeginAccSupp{ActualText=TeX}\TeX\EndAccSupp{}
</PRE>
See the section
"glossaries-accsupp code" in
the document <TT>glossaries.pdf</TT> for further details. It is
recommended that you also read the <TT>accsupp</TT><A NAME="9070"></A> documentation.
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<H1><A NAME="SECTION00040000000000000000"></A>
<A NAME="sec:mfirstuc"></A>
<BR>
Mfirstuc Package
</H1>
<P>
The <TT>glossaries</TT> bundle is supplied with the package
<TT>mfirstuc</TT><A NAME="9077"></A> which provides the command:
<P>
<TT>\makefirstuc{</TT><EM>stuff</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
which makes the first object of
<I>stuff</I> uppercase unless <I>stuff</I> starts with a control
sequence followed by a non-empty group, in which case the first
object in the group is converted to uppercase. Examples:
<UL>
<LI><code>\makefirstuc{abc}</code> produces Abc
<P>
</LI>
<LI><code>\makefirstuc{\emph{abc}}</code> produces <I>Abc</I>
(<TT>\MakeUppercase</TT><A NAME="9080"></A> has been applied to the letter "a" rather
than <TT>\emph</TT>.) Note however that
<code>\makefirstuc{{\em abc}}</code> produces <I>ABC</I> and
<code>{\makefirstuc{\em abc}}</code> produces abc.
<P>
</LI>
<LI><code>\makefirstuc{{\'a}bc}</code> produces Ábc
<P>
</LI>
<LI><code>\makefirstuc{\ae bc}</code> produces Æbc
<P>
</LI>
<LI><code>\makefirstuc{{\ae}bc}</code> produces Æbc
<P>
</LI>
<LI><code>\makefirstuc{{ä}bc}</code> produces Äbc
<P>
</LI>
</UL>
Note that non-Latin or accented characters appearing at the
start of the text must be placed in a group (even if you are
using the <TT>inputenc</TT><A NAME="9083"></A> package) due to expansion issues.
<P>
In version 1.02 of <TT>mfirstuc</TT>, a bug fix resulted in a change
in output if the first object is a control sequence followed by
an empty group. Prior to version 1.02, <code>\makefirstuc{\ae{}bc}</code>
produced æBc. However as from version 1.02, it now produces
Æbc.
<P>
Note also that
<PRE>
\newcommand{\abc}{abc}
\makefirstuc{\abc}
</PRE>
produces: ABC. This is because the first object in the argument of
<TT>\makefirstuc</TT> is <TT>\abc</TT>, so it does <code>\MakeUppercase\abc</code>.
Whereas:
<PRE>
\newcommand{\abc}{abc}
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\abc}
</PRE>
produces: Abc. There is a short cut command which will do this:
<BR>
<BR>
<P>
<TT>\xmakefirstuc{</TT><EM>stuff</EM><TT>}</TT>
<P>
This is equivalent to <TT>\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{</TT><EM>stuff</EM><TT>}</TT>. So
<PRE>
\newcommand{\abc}{abc}
\xmakefirstuc{\abc}
</PRE>
produces: Abc.
<P>
If you want to use an alternative command to convert to uppercase,
for example <TT>\MakeTextUppercase</TT>,<A NAME="tex2html40"
HREF="#foot4445"><SUP>16</SUP></A> you can redefine the internal
command <TT>\@gls@makefirstuc</TT>. For example:
<PRE>
\renewcommand{\@gls@makefirstuc}[1]{\MakeTextUppercase #1}
</PRE>
(Remember that command names that contain the @ character must
either be placed in packages or be placed between <TT>\makeatletter</TT>
and <TT>\makeatother</TT>.)
<P>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<P>
<BR>
<H2><A NAME="SECTION00050000000000000000">
Index</A>
</H2><DL COMPACT>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\Ac</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8129">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8135">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>accsupp</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9013">Accessibility Support</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9070">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\Acf</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8105">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8111">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\Acfp</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8117">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8123">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\Acl</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8081">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8087">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\Aclp</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8093">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8099">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\Acp</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8141">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8147">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrfull</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8108">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8114">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrfullpl</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8120">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8126">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrlong</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5328">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8084">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8090">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrlongpl</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8096">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8102">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\acrnameformat</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7811">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7814">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\acronymfont</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5857">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7808">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7926">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7999">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\acronymname</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4798">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\acronymtype</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5484">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5481">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5505">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5581">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6298">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7263">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7266">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrshort</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8060">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8066">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\Acrshortpl</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8072">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8078">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\Acs</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8057">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8063">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\Acsp</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8069">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8075">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>array</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8525">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8732">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>babel</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4757">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4764">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4782">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4828">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4840">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4862">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5319">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5979">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5999">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6014">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6036">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\defglsdisplay</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7619">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8021">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\defglsdisplayfirst</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7622">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8024">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\descriptionname</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4813">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\emph</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6531">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\entryname</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4810">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
<DT><STRONG>file types</STRONG>
<DD><DL COMPACT>
<DT><STRONG>.alg</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4982">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG>.aux</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5031">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7068">Language and Encodings</A>
<DT><STRONG>.glg</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4980">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5102">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5183">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5351">Troubleshooting</A>
<DT><STRONG>.glo</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5106">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5187">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6070">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG>.gls</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5104">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5185">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6072">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG>.ist</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5158">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5163">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5233">Note to Front-End and</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5908">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6092">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6109">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG>.log</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5349">Troubleshooting</A>
<DT><STRONG>.tex</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5081">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5156">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
<DT><STRONG>.xdy</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5086">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5088">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5238">Note to Front-End and</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5937">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6097">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6117">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7030">Xindy</A>
</DL>
<DT><STRONG>first use</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5290">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5300">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6056">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6743">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6780">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6795">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6840">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7260">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7307">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7404">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7572">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7642">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7717">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7774">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7831">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7840">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7841">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7842">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7870">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7909">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7981">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8236">Unsetting and Resetting Entry</A>
<DL COMPACT>
<DT><STRONG>flag</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6503">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6516">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6517">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6622">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6629">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6639">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6652">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6665">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6678">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6890">Using Glossary Terms Without</A>
<DT><STRONG>text</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6205">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6227">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6903">Using Glossary Terms Without</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6907">Using Glossary Terms Without</A>
</DL>
<DT><STRONG><TT>flowfram</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8631">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>fmtcount</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7125">Locations and Number lists</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>german</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4779">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>glossaries-accsupp</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4706">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9010">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>glossaries-babel</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4855">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6017">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6042">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>glossaries-polyglossia</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4865">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6024">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6045">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>glossary</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4545">Introduction</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5315">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8156">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8160">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8164">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG>glossary styles</STRONG>
<DD><DL COMPACT>
<DT><STRONG>altlist</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8378">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8388">List Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>altlistgroup</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8386">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8392">List Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>altlisthypergroup</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8390">List Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>altlong4col</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8306">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8476">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8490">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>altlong4colborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8500">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>altlong4colheader</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8504">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>altlong4colheaderborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8508">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>altlongragged4col</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8582">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8594">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8598">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>altlongragged4colborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8592">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>altlongragged4colheader</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8596">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8602">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>altlongragged4colheaderborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8600">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>altsuper4col</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8308">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8683">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8697">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>altsuper4colborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8707">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>altsuper4colheader</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8711">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>altsuper4colheaderborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8715">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4col</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8793">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8799">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8803">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4colborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8797">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4colheader</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8801">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8807">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>altsuperragged4colheaderborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8805">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>alttree</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8858">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8884">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8890">Tree-Like Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>alttreegroup</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8888">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8894">Tree-Like Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>alttreehypergroup</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8892">Tree-Like Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>index</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7647">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7749">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8833">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8840">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8850">Tree-Like Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>indexgroup</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8838">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8844">Tree-Like Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>indexhypergroup</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8842">Tree-Like Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>list</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5659">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8363">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8369">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8380">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8382">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8384">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8902">Defining your own glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8907">Defining your own glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8931">Defining your own glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8936">Defining your own glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8980">Example: creating a new</A>
<DT><STRONG>listdotted</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8333">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8398">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8400">List Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>listgroup</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8367">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8373">List Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>listhypergroup</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8371">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8394">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8846">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8868">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8882">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8896">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8929">Defining your own glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG>long</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8325">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8427">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8439">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8443">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8451">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>long3col</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8248">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8449">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8462">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8466">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8474">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>long3colborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8252">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8460">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>long3colheader</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8250">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8464">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8470">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>long3colheaderborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8254">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8468">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>long4col</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8302">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8472">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8480">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8484">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8492">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>long4colborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8478">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8502">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>long4colheader</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8482">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8488">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8506">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>long4colheaderborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8486">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8510">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>longborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8437">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>longheader</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8441">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8447">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8909">Defining your own glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG>longheaderborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8445">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>longragged</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8541">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8549">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8553">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8561">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>longragged3col</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8559">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8572">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8576">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8584">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>longragged3colborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8570">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>longragged3colheader</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8574">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8580">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>longragged3colheaderborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8578">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>longraggedborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8547">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>longraggedheader</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8551">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8557">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>longraggedheaderborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8555">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>super</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8634">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8646">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8650">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8658">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>super3col</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8656">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8669">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8673">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8681">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>super3colborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8667">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>super3colheader</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8671">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8677">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>super3colheaderborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8675">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>super4col</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8304">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8679">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8687">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8691">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8699">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>super4colborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8685">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8709">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>super4colheader</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8689">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8695">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8713">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>super4colheaderborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8693">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8717">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>superborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8644">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>superheader</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8648">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8654">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>superheaderborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8652">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>superragged</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8748">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8760">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8764">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8772">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>superragged3col</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8770">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8783">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8787">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8795">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>superragged3colborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8781">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>superragged3colheader</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8785">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8791">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>superragged3colheaderborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8789">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>superraggedborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8758">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>superraggedheader</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8762">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8768">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>superraggedheaderborder</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8766">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>tree</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8848">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8862">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8872">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8886">Tree-Like Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>treegroup</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8860">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8866">Tree-Like Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>treehypergroup</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8864">Tree-Like Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>treenoname</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8870">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8876">Tree-Like Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>treenonamegroup</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8874">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8880">Tree-Like Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>treenonamehypergroup</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8878">Tree-Like Styles</A>
</DL>
<DT><STRONG><TT>glossary-hypernav</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8926">Defining your own glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>glossary-list</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5655">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6996">Changing the way the</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8341">List Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>glossary-long</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5621">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6999">Changing the way the</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8405">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8518">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>glossary-longragged</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8515">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8522">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8528">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>glossary-super</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5638">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7002">Changing the way the</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8607">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8725">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>glossary-superragged</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8722">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8729">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8735">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>glossary-tree</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5680">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7005">Changing the way the</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8812">Tree-Like Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glossaryentryfield</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8959">Defining your own glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8991">Example: creating a glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glossaryentrynumbers</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8938">Defining your own glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glossaryheader</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8375">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8973">Example: creating a completely</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glossaryname</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4795">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glossarystyle</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5703">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6966">Displaying a glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8322">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8330">Glossary Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glossarysubentryfield</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8994">Example: creating a glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\gls</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4738">Multi-Lingual Support</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6194">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6203">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6505">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6660">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6738">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6787">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6817">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6842">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6869">Cross-Referencing Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8132">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8138">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8173">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8176">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8179">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8182">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8185">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8188">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8204">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8210">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8228">Unsetting and Resetting Entry</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsaddall</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4603">Sample Documents</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsaddall</TT> keys</STRONG>
<DD><DL COMPACT>
<DT><STRONG>types</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6863">Adding an Entry to</A>
</DL>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\GlsAddXdyAttribute</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6546">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\GlsAddXdyLocation</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7150">Locations and Number lists</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsclearpage</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5535">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsdefaulttype</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5487">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5499">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsdesc</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8002">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsdescwidth</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8434">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8454">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8494">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8544">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8564">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8586">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8641">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8661">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8701">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8755">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8775">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsdisp</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6519">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6775">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6793">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6848">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsdisplay</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6173">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6265">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6641">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6654">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6667">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsdisplayfirst</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6176">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6268">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6644">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6657">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6670">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsentryname</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6912">Using Glossary Terms Without</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsfirst</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8008">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsgroupheading</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8967">Example: creating a completely</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsgroupskip</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4593">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8319">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8970">Example: creating a completely</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glshyperlink</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6892">Using Glossary Terms Without</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glslabel</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6769">Changing the format of</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glslink</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6631">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6772">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6814">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6851">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6857">Adding an Entry to</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glslink</TT> keys</STRONG>
<DD><DL COMPACT>
<DT><STRONG>counter</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6607">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG>format</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6522">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6543">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7098">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7110">Locations and Number lists</A>
<DT><STRONG>hyper</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6610">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6820">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6860">Adding an Entry to</A>
</DL>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glsnumbersgroupname</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4825">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glspagelistwidth</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8457">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8497">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8567">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8589">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8664">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8704">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8778">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glspl</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6179">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6182">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6185">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6213">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6225">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6271">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6274">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6277">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6508">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6741">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6790">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6845">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8144">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8150">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8231">Unsetting and Resetting Entry</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glspluralsuffix</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6216">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6235">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glssee</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4539">Introduction</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6555">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\GlsSetXdyCodePage</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5022">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\GlsSetXdyLanguage</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5019">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6453">Number lists</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glssymbol</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8005">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glssymbolsgroupname</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4822">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glstext</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6673">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6680">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6686">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6692">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6704">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6716">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6728">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7992">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7996">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\glstextformat</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6783">Changing the format of</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>html</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6810">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperbf</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6577">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperemph</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6595">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperit</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6583">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperlink</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6598">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6823">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\hypermd</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6580">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperpage</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6558">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>hyperref</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6471">Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6499">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6561">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6807">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6829">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8933">Defining your own glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperrm</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6568">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7104">Locations and Number lists</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\hypersc</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6592">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\hypersf</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6571">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\hypersl</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6586">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\hypertarget</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6826">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\hypertt</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6574">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\hyperup</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6589">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\indexspace</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8835">Tree-Like Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>inputenc</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4651">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4741">Multi-Lingual Support</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6326">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7074">Language and Encodings</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9083">Mfirstuc Package</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\inputencodingname</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7077">Language and Encodings</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\jobname</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6106">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6114">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG>link text</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6489">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6501">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6502">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6612">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6736">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6781">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6802">Changing the format of</A>
<DT><STRONG>location list</STRONG>
<DD><i>see </i> number list
<DT><STRONG><TT>longtable</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5624">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8430">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\makefirstuc</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7917">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\makeglossaries</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4549">Introduction</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4558">Introduction</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4578">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4590">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4609">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4617">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4638">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4654">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4660">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4663">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4673">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4688">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4700">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4744">Multi-Lingual Support</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4750">Multi-Lingual Support</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4912">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4921">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4924">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4943">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4949">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4958">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4967">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4971">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5028">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5039">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5042">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5045">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5048">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5072">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5120">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5126">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5132">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5201">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5207">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5213">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5343">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5346">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5302">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5305">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5331">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5340">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5893">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5899">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5922">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5928">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5965">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6080">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6456">Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6477">Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6872">Cross-Referencing Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6918">Displaying a glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6933">Displaying a glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7065">Language and Encodings</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7086">Language and Encodings</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7092">Language and Encodings</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7119">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7122">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7137">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7140">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7156">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7159">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7169">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7172">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7191">Glossary Groups</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7194">Glossary Groups</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7207">Defining New Glossaries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7255">Defining New Glossaries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>makeindex</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4552">Introduction</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4561">Introduction</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4581">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4584">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4587">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4606">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4614">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4641">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4648">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4679">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4703">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4717">Multi-Lingual Support</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4723">Multi-Lingual Support</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4880">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4984">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4889">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4896">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4902">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4915">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4940">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4952">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4961">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4977">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5036">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5141">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5153">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5160">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5168">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5180">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5204">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5210">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5225">Note to Front-End and</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5230">Note to Front-End and</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5243">Note to Front-End and</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5311">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5359">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5890">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5896">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5902">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5934">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6083">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6089">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6103">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6111">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6286">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6332">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6444">Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6462">Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6491">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6525">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6540">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6921">Displaying a glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6927">Displaying a glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7201">Defining New Glossaries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8256">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8852">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8911">Defining your own glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\MakeUppercase</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9080">Mfirstuc Package</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>mfirstuc</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9077">Mfirstuc Package</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\newacronym</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4599">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5502">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5812">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5824">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5836">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5848">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5869">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7305">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7354">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7366">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7763">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7787">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7820">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8018">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8167">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\newglossary</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5117">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5198">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5406">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\newglossaryentry</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4596">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6486">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6620">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7457">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> keys</STRONG>
<DD><DL COMPACT>
<DT><STRONG>access</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9016">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>description</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5745">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5760">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5782">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6161">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6149">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6188">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6719">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6722">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6725">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6757">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7485">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7734">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7784">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9061">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>descriptionaccess</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9058">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>descriptionplural</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6170">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6760">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9067">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>descriptionpluralaccess</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9064">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>first</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6200">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6232">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6238">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6241">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6247">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6256">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6511">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6617">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6627">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6647">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6676">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6751">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6905">Using Glossary Terms Without</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7479">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8234">Unsetting and Resetting Entry</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9031">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>firstaccess</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9028">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>firstplural</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6222">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6244">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6253">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6347">Plurals</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6637">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6689">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6754">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6909">Using Glossary Terms Without</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9043">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>firstpluralaccess</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9040">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>format</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6601">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG>name</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5742">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5763">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5779">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5794">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5797">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6155">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6146">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6152">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6197">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6292">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6366">Homographs</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6695">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6698">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6701">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6895">Using Glossary Terms Without</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7728">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7731">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8917">Defining your own glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9019">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>nonumberlist</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6316">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG>parent</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6167">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6158">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6357">Hierarchical Categories</A>
<DT><STRONG>plural</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6210">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6229">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6250">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6341">Plurals</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6344">Plurals</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6376">Homographs</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6634">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6683">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6748">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6901">Using Glossary Terms Without</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9037">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>pluralaccess</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9034">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>see</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4542">Introduction</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6320">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6323">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6552">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6875">Cross-Referencing Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6878">Cross-Referencing Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6881">Cross-Referencing Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG>sort</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5353">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5788">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6283">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6329">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6373">Homographs</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7760">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7817">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8914">Defining your own glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8920">Defining your own glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG>symbol</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5748">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5766">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5785">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6259">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6280">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6707">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6710">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6713">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6763">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6778">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6800">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7488">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7644">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7737">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9049">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>symbolaccess</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9046">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>symbolplural</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6262">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6766">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9055">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>symbolpluralaccess</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9052">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>text</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5791">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5800">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6191">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6207">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6219">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6514">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6614">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6624">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6650">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6663">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6745">Changing the format of</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6898">Using Glossary Terms Without</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7482">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8238">Unsetting and Resetting Entry</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9025">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>textaccess</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9022">Accessibility Support</A>
<DT><STRONG>type</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6295">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6382">Loading Entries From a</A>
<DT><STRONG>user1</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="#13033">no title</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6310">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6731">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8985">no title</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8997">Example: creating a glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9000">Example: creating a glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG>user2</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#9003">Example: creating a glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG>user6</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="#13039">no title</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6313">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8988">no title</A>
</DL>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\newglossarystyle</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8327">Glossary Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\newline</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6164">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8310">Glossary Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>ngerman</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4776">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7036">Xindy</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\nohyperpage</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6474">Number lists</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\noist</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4666">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6459">Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6480">Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7046">Xindy</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7083">Language and Encodings</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7116">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7134">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7153">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7166">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7188">Glossary Groups</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\nopostdesc</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6360">Hierarchical Categories</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6369">Homographs</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8335">Glossary Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>number list</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4601">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4612">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4969">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5720">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5730">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6121">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6143">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6144">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6318">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6352">Sub-Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6371">Homographs</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6424">Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6496">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6883">Cross-Referencing Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7142">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7161">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7199">Defining New Glossaries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8365">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8396">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8432">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8452">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8542">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8562">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8639">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8659">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8753">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8773">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8975">Example: creating a completely</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\oldacronym</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8170">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG>package options</STRONG>
<DD><DL COMPACT>
<DT><STRONG>acronym</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4806">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4808">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5098">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5100">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5113">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5115">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5176">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5178">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5194">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5196">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5402">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5404">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5468">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5470">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5477">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5479">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5495">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5497">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5576">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5578">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5589">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5591">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5598">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5600">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6306">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6308">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6390">Loading Entries From a</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6392">Loading Entries From a</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6399">Loading Entries From a</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6401">Loading Entries From a</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6408">Loading Entries From a</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6410">Loading Entries From a</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6417">Loading Entries From a</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6419">Loading Entries From a</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7224">Defining New Glossaries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7226">Defining New Glossaries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7233">Defining New Glossaries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7235">Defining New Glossaries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7242">Defining New Glossaries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7244">Defining New Glossaries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7274">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7276">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG>acronymlists</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5513">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5515">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5522">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5524">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7251">Defining New Glossaries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7253">Defining New Glossaries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7283">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7285">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG>counter</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5727">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5729">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6128">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6130">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6440">Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6442">Number lists</A>
<DT><STRONG>description</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5808">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5810">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7332">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7334">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7392">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7394">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7496">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7498">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7514">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7516">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7532">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7534">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7615">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7617">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7630">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7632">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7724">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7726">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7745">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7747">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7756">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7758">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7771">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7773">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7867">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7869">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7906">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7908">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7978">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7980">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG>dua</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5865">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5867">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7341">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7343">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7523">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7525">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7568">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7570">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7606">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7608">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7678">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7680">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7687">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7689">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7804">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7806">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7969">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7971">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG>footnote</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5820">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5822">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7292">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7294">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7350">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7352">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7401">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7403">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7505">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7507">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7541">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7543">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7597">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7599">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7639">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7641">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7696">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7698">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7795">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7797">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7828">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7830">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7858">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7860">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7897">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7899">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7960">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7962">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG>hyperfirst</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5278">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6053">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6055">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6063">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6837">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A>
<DD><DL COMPACT>
<DT><STRONG>false</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5280">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6839">Enabling and disabling hyperlinks</A>
<DT><STRONG>true</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6065">Package Options</A>
</DL>
<DT><STRONG>makeindex</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5886">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5888">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG>nolist</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5650">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5652">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8350">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8352">List Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>nolong</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5616">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5618">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8280">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8282">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8414">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8416">Longtable Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>nomain</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5393">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5395">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7215">Defining New Glossaries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7217">Defining New Glossaries</A>
<DT><STRONG>nonumberlist</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5717">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5719">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6431">Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6433">Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8946">Defining your own glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8948">Defining your own glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8955">Defining your own glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8957">Defining your own glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG>nostyles</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5689">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5691">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8298">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8300">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8359">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8361">List Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8423">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8425">Longtable Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8625">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8627">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8829">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8831">Tree-Like Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>nosuper</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5633">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5635">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8289">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8291">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8616">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8618">Supertabular Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>notree</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5675">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5677">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8820">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8822">Tree-Like Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>nowarn</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5383">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5385">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG>numberedsection</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5543">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5545">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5552">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5554">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5567">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6977">Displaying a glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6979">Displaying a glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6986">Displaying a glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6988">Displaying a glossary</A>
<DD><DL COMPACT>
<DT><STRONG>autolabel</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5569">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5560">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG>false</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5556">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG>nolabel</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5558">Package Options</A>
</DL>
<DT><STRONG>numberline</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5423">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5425">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5459">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5461">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG>order</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4625">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4634">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4995">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5004">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5957">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5959">Package Options</A>
<DD><DL COMPACT>
<DT><STRONG>letter</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4636">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4997">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5963">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG>word</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4627">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5006">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5961">Package Options</A>
</DL>
<DT><STRONG>sanitize</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5737">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5739">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5756">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5758">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5774">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7655">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7657">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7663">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7670">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7781">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7838">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7880">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7934">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7988">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7990">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8015">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8016">Acronyms</A>
<DD><DL COMPACT>
<DT><STRONG>description</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7664">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7839">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG>none</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5776">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG>symbol</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7671">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7782">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7881">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7935">Acronyms</A>
</DL>
<DT><STRONG>section</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5531">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5533">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG>shortcuts</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5877">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5879">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7362">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7364">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8032">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8034">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8044">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8046">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8053">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8055">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG>smallcaps</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5260">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5262">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5269">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5271">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5832">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5834">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7301">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7303">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7314">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7316">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7374">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7376">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7420">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7422">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7429">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7431">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7465">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7467">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7550">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7552">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7579">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7581">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7714">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7716">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7849">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7851">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7942">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7944">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG>smaller</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5287">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5289">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5297">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5299">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5844">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5846">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7323">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7325">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7383">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7385">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7411">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7413">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7438">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7440">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7450">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7452">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7474">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7476">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7559">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7561">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7588">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7590">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7705">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7707">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7888">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7890">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7951">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7953">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG>style</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5607">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5609">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5666">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5668">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5699">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5701">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6962">Displaying a glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6964">Displaying a glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8270">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8272">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8536">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8538">Longtable Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8743">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8745">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG>toc</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5414">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5416">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5432">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5434">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5441">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5443">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5450">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5452">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6950">Displaying a glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6952">Displaying a glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG>translate</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4851">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4873">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5973">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5975">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5995">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6032">Package Options</A>
<DD><DL COMPACT>
<DT><STRONG>false</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4853">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4875">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6034">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5988">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG>true</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5997">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5977">Package Options</A>
</DL>
<DT><STRONG>xindy</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4696">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4698">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4734">Multi-Lingual Support</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4736">Multi-Lingual Support</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4933">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4935">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5013">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5015">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5065">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5067">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5149">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5151">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5915">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5917">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5944">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5946">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6140">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6142">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7019">Xindy</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7021">Xindy</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7184">Glossary Groups</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7186">Glossary Groups</A>
</DL>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\pagelistname</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4819">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>pod2man</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5051">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>polyglossia</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4760">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4859">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5982">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6021">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6039">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\printglossaries</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5337">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6077">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\printglossary</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5334">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5709">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6074">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8262">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8316">Glossary Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\printglossary</TT> keys</STRONG>
<DD><DL COMPACT>
<DT><STRONG>nonumberlist</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6990">Displaying a glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG>numberedsection</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6969">Displaying a glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG>style</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5706">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6954">Displaying a glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8259">Glossary Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8313">Glossary Styles</A>
<DT><STRONG>title</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6939">Displaying a glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG>toctitle</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6942">Displaying a glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG>type</STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6936">Displaying a glossary</A>
</DL>
<DT><STRONG><TT>relsize</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5851">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7442">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7923">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\seename</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6885">Cross-Referencing Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\setAlphaCompositor</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7147">Locations and Number lists</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\setCompositor</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7144">Locations and Number lists</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\setStyleFile</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5090">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5165">Using makeindex explicitly</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\smaller</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7911">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>supertabular</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5641">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8637">Supertabular Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8751">Supertabular Styles (Ragged Right)</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\symbolname</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4816">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\textbf</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6528">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\textrm</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7101">Locations and Number lists</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\textsc</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7872">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\textsmaller</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5854">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7914">Acronyms</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7920">Acronyms</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>\thepage</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7128">Locations and Number lists</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>translator</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4767">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4770">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4773">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4785">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4789">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4831">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4834">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4837">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4843">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5323">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5985">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6002">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6005">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6008">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6011">Package Options</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>xindy</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4555">Introduction</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4564">Introduction</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4645">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4657">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4670">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4676">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4682">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4685">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4714">Multi-Lingual Support</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4720">Multi-Lingual Support</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4726">Multi-Lingual Support</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4747">Multi-Lingual Support</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4753">Multi-Lingual Support</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4877">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4883">Changing the Fixed Names</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4987">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4892">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4899">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4905">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4908">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4918">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4937">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4955">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4964">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4974">Generating the Associated Glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5033">Using the makeglossaries Perl</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5057">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5069">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5075">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5078">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5083">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5123">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5129">Using xindy explicitly</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5222">Note to Front-End and</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5235">Note to Front-End and</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5240">Note to Front-End and</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5308">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5356">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5362">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5365">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5368">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5371">Troubleshooting</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5905">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5919">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5925">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5931">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5948">Package Options</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6086">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6094">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6100">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6119">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6132">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6289">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6335">Defining Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6447">Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6450">Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6465">Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6468">Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6494">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6537">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6549">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6604">Links to Glossary Entries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6924">Displaying a glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#6930">Displaying a glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7011">Xindy</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7023">Xindy</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7027">Xindy</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7032">Xindy</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7039">Xindy</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7043">Xindy</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7050">Xindy</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7053">Xindy</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7059">Language and Encodings</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7062">Language and Encodings</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7071">Language and Encodings</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7080">Language and Encodings</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7089">Language and Encodings</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7107">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7113">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7131">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7163">Locations and Number lists</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#7204">Defining New Glossaries</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8855">Tree-Like Styles</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8923">Defining your own glossary</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>xkeyval</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#4574">Sample Documents</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#5252">Troubleshooting</A>
<DT><STRONG><TT>xspace</TT></STRONG>
<DD><A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8191">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8195">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8198">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8201">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8207">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8216">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
| <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#8219">Upgrading From the glossary</A>
</DL>
<P>
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#top">Top</A>
<P>
<BR><HR><H4>Footnotes</H4>
<DL>
<DT><A NAME="foot4474">... used</A><A
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html2"><SUP>1</SUP></A></DT>
<DD>that is, if the term has been
referenced using any of the commands described in <A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glslink">Links to Glossary Entries</A>,
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:glsadd">Adding an Entry to the
Glossary Without Generating Text</A> or
via <TT>\glssee</TT><A NAME="4539"></A> (or the <TT>see</TT><A NAME="4542"></A> key)
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="foot4254">...
Site.</A><A
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html17"><SUP>2</SUP></A></DT>
<DD><TT>http://xindy.sourceforge.net/</TT>
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="foot4258">...main.</A><A
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html19"><SUP>3</SUP></A></DT>
<DD>Actually it sets <TT>\acronymtype</TT><A NAME="5484"></A> to
<TT>\glsdefaulttype</TT><A NAME="5487"></A> if the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5495"></A> package option is
not used, but <TT>\glsdefaulttype</TT><A NAME="5499"></A> usually has the value
<TT>main</TT>.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="foot4259">...acronym</A><A
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html20"><SUP>4</SUP></A></DT>
<DD>if the
<TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="5576"></A> option is used, otherwise the list of
acronyms is the main glossary
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="foot4283">... this.</A><A
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html21"><SUP>5</SUP></A></DT>
<DD>The
only preamble restriction on <TT>\newglossaryentry</TT> and <TT>\newacronym</TT>
was removed in version 1.13, but the restriction remains for
<TT>\loadglsentries</TT>.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="foot4317">... specified.</A><A
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html22"><SUP>6</SUP></A></DT>
<DD>This
is because <TT>\acronymtype</TT> is set to <TT>\glsdefaulttype</TT> if
the <TT>acronym</TT><A NAME="6408"></A> package option is not used.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="foot4350">... label</A><A
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html24"><SUP>7</SUP></A></DT>
<DD><TT>main</TT> for the main
(default) glossary, <TT>\acronymtype</TT> for the list of acronyms, or the
name supplied in the first mandatory argument to <TT>\newglossary</TT> for
additional glossaries.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="foot4479">... hyphen</A><A
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html26"><SUP>8</SUP></A></DT>
<DD>see
<TT>\setCompositor</TT><A NAME="7144"></A> described in
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:newglosentry">Defining Glossary
Entries</A>
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="foot4480">...
hyphen</A><A
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html27"><SUP>9</SUP></A></DT>
<DD>see <TT>\setAlphaCompositor</TT><A NAME="7147"></A> described in
<A HREF="glossaries-manual.html#sec:newglosentry">Defining Glossary
Entries</A>
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="foot4398">...textsmaller,</A><A
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html28"><SUP>10</SUP></A></DT>
<DD>you will need to load a package, such as
<TT>relsize</TT>, that defines <TT>\textsmaller</TT> if you use this
option.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="foot4411">...
<code>\textsmaller{#1}</code>.</A><A
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html32"><SUP>11</SUP></A></DT>
<DD>not that this was change from
using <TT>\smaller</TT><A NAME="7911"></A> to <TT>\textsmaller</TT><A NAME="7914"></A> as declarations
cause a problem for <TT>\makefirstuc</TT><A NAME="7917"></A>.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="foot3348">... package</A><A
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html34"><SUP>12</SUP></A></DT>
<DD>as from version 1.18
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="foot4418">... column.</A><A
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html37"><SUP>13</SUP></A></DT>
<DD>these lengths will not be
available if you use both the <TT>nolong</TT><A NAME="8280"></A> and <TT>nosuper</TT><A NAME="8289"></A>
package options or if you use the <TT>nostyles</TT><A NAME="8298"></A> package option
unless you explicitly load the relevant package.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="foot3576">...
environment.</A><A
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html38"><SUP>14</SUP></A></DT>
<DD>This style was supplied by Axel Menzel.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="foot4421">...supertabular.</A><A
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html39"><SUP>15</SUP></A></DT>
<DD>e.g. with the <TT>flowfram</TT><A NAME="8631"></A>
package.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="foot4445">...MakeTextUppercase,</A><A
HREF="glossaries-manual.html#tex2html40"><SUP>16</SUP></A></DT>
<DD>defined in the
<TT>textcase</TT> package
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR>
</BODY>
</HTML>
|
